Home

design_architect_tra..

1.
2.
3. Design Architect in the Framework Environment moate L y Creating a Schematic Module 2 z L y Component Structure Review Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 e Component Interface Content y PERS maniacal a aia rie than ne Schematic Editing Features Module 4 y MODEL Property z Design Hierarchy and e Registering More than Functional
4. Framework Environment Module 1 y Creating a Schematic Module 2 7 fi e Setting Up Pin Grid and y Snap Grid Spacing Creating a Symbol e Adding Comment Text and Adding Properties Module 3 and Graphics y e Adding Bus Rippers Additional Editing Features Module 4 e Working with Frames y Selection Sets Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Modes Reporting on Objects e Setting Schematic and Vv Sheet Check Levels Working with SSS Se eee Design Viewpoints Module 6 y Component Interfaces and Registration Module 7 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Lesson 1 Additional Editing Features Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 3 Additional Editing
5. y Using Design Manager to Release Designs 2 2 Module Module 1 odule 3 Module 4 Module 5 Module 6 Module 7 Module 8 e Invoking DA and Opening a Sheet e Placing Instances e Adding Nets e Manipulating Objects e Checking and Saving a Sheet e Using the Hierarchy Window e Using the Component Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Lesson Creating a Schematic 2 3
6. y Working with Design Viewpoints Module6 Design References E Review e Creating a Component Interfaces p Configuration and Registration e Copying a Configuration y e Working with Versions Module 8 to Release Designs Using Design on Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Desi
7. y Creating a Schematic Module 2 y Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 y Additional e Hierarchical Design Editing Features Module 4 e Creating Functional
8. Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 6 Module 7 Module 8 e Opening a Symbol e Creating Body Graphics e Adding Pins e Checking and Saving the Symbol e Properties Defined e SLD Properties e Common Properties for Various Applications e Adding Changing and Deleting Properties Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Lesson 1 Creating a Symbol Creating a Symbol
9. xiv Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 About This Training Workbook Introduction Course Overview 1 Design Architect and the Falcon Environment Introduces the Electronic Design Data Model EDDM explains common elements in the Falcon Framework User Interface covers how to reference and relocate design objects and introduces the editors within Design Architect Creating a Schematic Describes how to invoke the Schematic Editor and create a schematic using the most efficient entry methods Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Describes how to create a symbol for a new component and annotate the symbol and associated schematic with common properties and property values Creating Design Hierarchy Covers how to create layers of design hierarchy The more advanced editing features are also covered such as how to set the pin and grid spacing create buses and bus rippers frames selection sets and comment text and graphics Creating Functional Blocks Shows how Design Architect supports top down design methodology by drawing functional blocks on a schematic sheet then converting the blocks into symbols and new components structures for lower levels of the design hierarchy Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Covers design viewpoints and back annotation in more detail Explains how to create and co
10. COPY MOVE FastScan FlexTest F A wi di at all t FK i x L EDE FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Open Obje Unselect A Goto Direc Popup Men Move Obje S Show Refe Open Moni Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Open Navil Select Obj Explore P opy Objed C Change Re Read File Close Win Report Inf Select All Navigator hange Ob A Check Refe e Ie 3 Click the Maximize button to fill the screen with Design Manager or use the Full size window menu option Maximize m Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 65 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Note some window environments may have a menu choice that performs this function Within the Session window the Tools window is on the left and the Navigator window is on the right The Navigator window displays the contents of the current working directory which is typically the shell directory from which Design Manager was invoked The Navigator window is the active window which is identified by the blue border All the pulldown menus in the top banner are associated with the Navigator window at this time The icons you see in the Navigator window reflect the contents of you working directory The Tools window displays the tool icons representing the applications in your hotbox directory 4 If the training directory doesn t already exist crea
11. y Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Lesson 1 Design Viewpoint Concepts Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 3 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Design Viewpoint Conceptual View Design Architect J Design MTE A Viewpoint ee Ez Editor i VIEWPOINT eee oe SHEET D gt l ie OPEN VPT Simulator Back Annotation Object P gt 10 4 lt X go i ematic Simulator Simulator Design Viewpoint What the Simulator Sees 6 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Design Viewpoint Conceptual View Schematics are represented by files and directories in a software environment so they can take on some of the characteristics of a software program A timing value for example can be represented by a numeric expression such as X 5 as shown in the figure on the left This expression must be evaluated to a constant before a downstream tool like a simulator can operate on it The object in the data model that allows a down
12. Design Architect T in the Framework Environment y Creating a Schematic PEET y Creating a Symbol ii and Adding Properties l Additional Editing Features y Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks i i y Working with Design Viewpoints y Component Interfaces and Registration i i
13. MGC required MGC required MGC required on I 2 on I 2 on I 3 on 1 3 MGC required MGC required MGC required s 4 warnings ____________Shoek 9 my otsSeet O Check Sheet my_dff schematic sheet1 Check SymbolPins 0O errors 0 warnings Check Overlap 0O errors 0 warnings Check NotDots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Closedots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Dangl 0O errors 0 warnings Check INIT Props 0O errors 0 warnings Check Owner 0O errors 0 warnings Check Instanc 0O errors 4 warnings Warning Unable to evaluate property fall Unable to resolv xpression symbol qbfall Warning Unable to evaluate property rise Unable to resolv xpression symbol qbrise Warning Unable to evaluate property fall Unable to resolv xpression symbol qrise Warning Unable to evaluate property rise Unable to resolv xpression symbol qbfall Check Special QO errors 0 warnings Check Net QO errors 0 warnings Check Fram QO errors 0 warnings my_dff schematic sheet passed check 0 error IN Notice that you received warning messages about the current values of the Rise and Fall properties These messages indicate that the Rise and Fall property values are expressions and can t be evaluated at this time This is normal If your check results in errors you can identify handle names like I 2 by clicking the handle name in the Check Stat
14. Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Lesson 1 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 3 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Hierarchical Design A K a Component Structure Component Structure a Component es Structure 5 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Hierarchical Design The illustration on the left shows a three level hierarchical design that is represented by the symbol TEAM_DESIGN Assume that this symbol represents an ASIC or other type of complex module that is ready to be instantiated on a sheet representing an even more complex system level design The TEAM_DESIGN schematic is broken into four functional blocks each representing a more detailed structure The CRTL block is represented by a schematic containing library parts on
15. y Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Module 5 Working with Design Viewpoints Module 6 y Component Interfaces and Registration Module 7 y Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8
16. PRE xX 0 0 CLR 0 EN Q O Q D E 4 10 0 SET 0 SET 10 CLK EN a QB 0 2 0 0 0 CLR CLR O 0 0 2 58 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Lab Exercises Objectives In the following exercises you will e Invoke Design Architect open a new schematic sheet and create the schematic shown on the left e Perform an exercise that will help you to understand and use net connection rules Learn how to change the selection filter through the use of strokes e Browse a design hierarchy using the Component Hierarchy WIndow e Browse a component structure and component interface table using the Component Window If you finish early you may do Exercise 2 in Appendix A for extra credit In this exercise you will learn how to create a Design Architect startup file Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 59 Creating a Schematic Exercise 1 Creating a Schematic Introduction In this exercise you will create a new component structure and schematic for a D type flip flop The schematic is shown below PRE lt lt y 0 0 CLR 0 EN Q gt O Q D m gt O 10 0 SET 0 SET IO CLK
17. Blocks Design Hierarchy and e Updating and Functional Blocks Module 5 Replacing Instances y Working with Design Viewpoints Module 6 y Component Interfaces and Registration Module 7
18. y Using Design Manager to Release Designs 1 2 Module1 odule 2 Module 3 Module 4 Module 5 Module 6 Module 7 Module 8 e The Electronic Design Data Model EDDM e Common Elements of the User Interface e Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files e Viewing and Searching Online Documentation e Using Design Manager to Copy Objects Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 1 The Electronic Design Data Model Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 3 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Architect and the EDDM Design Architect Schematic po Seles gooo o Editor a i 2 4 r Electronic Design Data Model Libraries 1 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Architect and the EDDM Design Architect a Tool Box You can think of Design Architect as a tool box containing a collection of tools graphic and text editors that are used to create and modify the data that is modeling your design The three primary tools in Design Architect are the Symbol Editor the Schematic Editor and the VHDL Editor Many other optional tools can be added to Design Architect through the use of Personality Modules The Electronic Desig
19. E rr E SETUP SETUP m m SESSION MONITOR qsim85inwp KELSA I E lt 4 JAHRE MONITOR 1 Click on Object ah we A NAVIGATE TOOLS 2 Draw C Stroke with middle mouse button i FE al BS j ARCHY PONENT 3 Sa E CONFIG TRASH L 3 Enter pathname of LJ local training directory Bre SEA COPY MOVE FastScan FlexTest i AMi at E o eai 4 Click OK aleae kelmi r Il a F11 F12 z own M Command Pop Windo COP OB Destination users train1 training da_n Options fe Cancel Read File Close Win 1 Copy operation was successful a _ 5 Look for message The hourglass 1 prompt should appear while the data is being copied After the y prompt disappears and the Copy operation was successful message appears navigate to the HOME training directory and the da_n icon should appear 1 68 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 8 View the contents of the da_n directory by double clicking on the da_n icon The contents of this directory includes the following ample_source contains information that you will use in customization exercises later in this course
20. 1 58 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Moving and Deleting Design Objects You can use either the Design Manager to move or delete a design or component You can also use Integrated Design Management DM functions which enable you to manage design data that you create in Mentor Graphics applications by providing easy access to copy move delete and change references In essence a moved design object is one that is copied and then deleted When you move an object within a component or design all objects in the containment hierarchy of the selected object are also moved When you move design objects that refer to other design objects in the selected set the Design Manager automatically updates those references to reflect the new location Unresolved references or references to external objects remain unchanged Any design objects that reference the moved object within the containment of a component are also automatically updated to reflect the new location However any external references that point to the moved object are not updated that is they continue to point to a design object that no longer exists You need to understand the design well enough to decide whether moving the design will break external references The Design Manager allows all objects within the component container to be moved with the exception of symbols Symbols are not allo
21. ADD WI Locations ica repeat true OK cane Click to Exit Add Wire Mode e Press Backspace key to backup 2 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Nets Creation Process The example on the facing page shows that after the prompt bar is displayed a net is started by clicking the Select mouse button on the starting point usually an instance pin Corner points net vertices are made by clicking once on a point and the end of the net is defined by a double click You can continue to add other nets by clicking the Select mouse button You exit from add wire mode by clicking the Cancel button on the still displayed ADD WIre prompt bar The ADD BUS functionality works the same way If you are in the process of building a net you can backtrack to a previous net vertex by pressing the BackSpace key When you are connecting a net to a pin you must have the pointer within one third of the pin spacing unit for the net to snap to the pin If you don t the net vertex snaps to another grid When you check the sheet the check software flags this as a warning a dangling net and an unconnected pin If you think that you missed the connection you can zoom into the area witha stroke to take a closer look Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 27 Creating a Schematic Autorouting Nets Schematic 1 my_dff sheet1 1 Click to Start 2 Double cli
22. IN Al gt e From I 2 Before After __Schematic 274161_ _ I 3 194 A X 4 4 REF properties REF properties 6 70 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing and Editing Properties continued The top two windows on the opposite page illustrate the schematic under the I 1 instance of 74161 The top left window shows the REF property values with the annotations turned off When the Setup gt Annotation Evaluations gt Toggle Annotations menu item is executed the property value of Al changes to U1 and turns red in color This is because the back annotation object contains an entry for 1 1 I 3 whose REF property value is U1 The bottom two windows on the opposite page illustrate the schematic under the I 2 instance of 74161 The bottom left window shows the REF property values with the annotations turned off When the Setup gt Annotation Evaluations gt Toggle Annotations menu item is executed the property value of Al changes to U2 and turns red in color This is because the back annotation object contains an entry for I 1 I 3 whose REF property value is U2 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 71 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotated Property Evaluation e Design El COMP properties
23. Startup File Path Open as o Vy Editable Read Only gt 1 Click Reset Cancel 3 Click OK 4 Double click on the border of the ADD_CONVERT instance to open down 5 Click OK on the Sheet Name prompt form A window with the add_convert schematic should appear 6 Zoom into an area so you can clearly see the properties on an inv instance 7 Choose the pulldown menu item Setup gt Annotations Evaluations gt Toggle Evaluations The annotated rise property now displays as the parameter name inv_rise and the annotated fall property now displays as the parameter name inv_fall 6 104 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Choose the pulldown menu item Setup gt Annotations Evaluations gt Toggle Annotations The annotations are turned off and the rise and fall properties are displayed as they appear on the source schematic Toggle Annotations back on Select the RISE and FALL property value of one inv instance Choose the pulldown menu item Miscellaneous gt Merge Annotations gt Selected Unselect All Notice that the selected property values turn from red to the color of the design object that own the properties magenta for a pin Toggle Evaluations back on Notice that the merged property values are evaluated to constants because they are still being viewed in the context of a design viewpoint
24. a as e Back Annotation Object Instance Pathname Property Name Property Value A I 1 I 3 REF U1 I 2 I 3 REF U2 I 1 I 4 REF MIL5 Pin Pathname Property Name Property Value Net Pathname Property Name Property Value 1 N i 6 72 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotated Property Evaluation The example on the facing and the next pages shows how properties are evaluated with an expression as the property value on the schematic sheet The facing page displays the aspects of this example e A design named my_design has two 74161 instances each of which has a COMP property whose value is 74161 and whose handles are I 1 and I 2 respectively e A design viewpoint called default is associated with the my_design design e A back annotation object called default is connected to the viewpoint default The default back annotation object has a new REF property value defined for I 1 1 4 The next page displays the results that are displayed when the annotations and evaluations are toggled on and off Remember the property value evaluation rules that were previously discussed Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 73 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotation Property Evaluation Continued From I 1 e Evaluations off
25. MOVE UNSELECT ALL ADD PIN ADD RE ote eooo Bete wee eae aie ete eotee ete ep presterade epee ete ew ete ee paapa spes stees esatie ete we eto ee toe we etos ete ecto pe gree eta mae ote eo feeetee e ee e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o oo o o o o o o o o o o o o ol ol epee ete we ete ere E E E E E eter E e o o o o o o o o o o ooo o o ooo oo o o o o o o o o o ol ol ol ete e etee oe eetee etee ete eotee ete e e o o o o o o o o o o o ooo ooo oo o o o o o o o o o o ol l spea stesa penates s dbe s eter eteeetee Snap Grid Pin Grid F12 F11 Read File Close Win F10 FQ F8 View All FU Sel Txt amp View Area Setup Ses Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Open Up Open Dow Chg Text S Cc A F6 FS Add Prope Connect A F4 Reselect Check She F3 Copy F2 FA Select Are Unselect A Add Wire Popup Me Place Sym Set Grid S Select Ver Unselect A Add Bus Move Reopen Sel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 8 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Symbol Editor Window When the Symbol Editor window opens it becomes the active window The menu bar changes to symbol pulldown menus and the symbol_draw palette replaces the Session palette The Context window contains
26. DAY 1 DAY 2 9 00 Design Architect Pesign 10 00 in the Falcon Hierarchy and Framework Functional Blocks 11 00 Creating a Working with Design Schematic za ia 12 00 ewpoints LUNCH 1 00 Creating a bA a with Schematic cont hae ce Viewpoints cont 2 00 Creating a Cani Symbol and Interfaces and oe Registration Properties 8 3 00 na Using Design 4 00 Additional Manager to Editing Features Release Designs 5 00 xviii Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 1 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 1 The Electronic Design Data Model ____SSS S CSCSCSCSsi 3 Lesson 2 Common Elements of the User Interface___ a S Lesson 3 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files 1 37 Lesson 4 Viewing and Searching Online Documentation _____ s d 4 1 Lesson 5 Using Design Manager to Copy Objects Cd A4O Lab Exercises 1 63 Copying the Training Data___ sd 4 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCH Files___ 1 71 Viewing and Searching Online Documents 1 77 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 1 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Module 1 Overview
27. Handle OK Reset Cancel Report 2 my off Reporting L Logical Symbol Logical Symbol Property Name Location T 98 AUTHOR no location e Edit gt Edit Operations gt Delete gt Property 3 50 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Reporting On and Deleting Logical Symbol Properties The only way to see nongraphic logical symbol properties is to generate a report as shown on the left From the menu bar choose Report gt Object gt As Specified click the Logical Symbol button on the form and click OK If you create a symbol add properties to the symbol body graphics then delete the graphic object the properties are not deleted but turn into logical symbol properties If you then recreate the symbol body graphics and try to add the same properties the system won t let you because the properties are already defined as logical symbol properties The only solution to the above dilemma is to first delete the logical symbol properties by name then re attach the properties to the newly created symbol body graphics The pulldown menu path Edit gt Edit Operations gt Delete gt Properties is the only way to delete nongraphic logical symbol properties Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 51 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Changing Property Values e Ways to select properties o By
28. PROJ_A my_design part i A component interface PROJ_A my_design my_symbol PROJ_A my_design schematic symbol schematic i y Attribute S Pd LEGEND File Component Directory Structure gt Reference Pathname gt sheet mgc_sheet attr PROJ_A my_design schematic sheet1 schematic sheet Reference a pointer between two design objects e References are keep in associated attr file e You can check and modify references using Design Manager functionality 1 54 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Object References A reference is a pointer from one design object to another design object Each reference consists of the pathname to the design object its type and a version specifier References show relationships between design objects Design Architect creates references within the component You can create and modify references using the Design Manager You can modify DA created references using the Design Manager or Design Architect However if you modify these references within the Design Manager you run the risk of modifying them incorrectly You can display design object references by invoking the Report gt Show References menu path in the Design Manager pulldown menu or you can click on the Show References right arrow icon in the Navi
29. MOVE COPY DELETE UNDO strokes BDA schematic palette D gt slo D 0 De ect Sle FLIP ROTATE ALIGN PIVOT strokes Rotate Copy Multiple e Select objects then click icon or draw stroke e Net connectivity is preserved 2 42 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Manipulating Objects After selecting an object s you can manipulate it them by clicking the COPY MOVE DELETE FLIP ROTATE ALIGN and PIVOT palette items as shown on the left You can manipulate the objects a little faster by using the equivalent stroke as shown on the left These actions preserve the net connectivity that existed before the edit For example if a net vertex is placed over any existing pin or vertex no connections are made at those vertices However not dots appear at those vertices as a warning that what might appear to be a connection is not Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 43 Creating a Schematic Interwindow Copy and Move 1 Select Objects 2 Execute Copy or Move 3 Move cursor to second window 4 Click the Select Button i Ea 2 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Interwindow Copy and Move Moving and Copying schematic objects from one sheet to another or from one schematic to an
30. Bie r View Help 1 1572 1 8591 MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Check Report W dae my_dffl schemaitc sheet1 Sel 0 Active Symbol Window There is no active symbol schematic_add_route SESSION ADD ROUTE TEXT DRAW DELETE UNDO a MOVE COPY Schematic z UNSELECT ET SELEC Palette ALL FILTER thy D CHOOSE SYMBOL F er T ADD ADD BUS Context Window F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 i F12 Select Are Unselect A Add Wire Popup Me Place Sym Set Grid S Sel Txt amp View Area Setup Ses Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Select Ver Unselect A Add Bus Add Prope Connect A Y Chg Text V View All Read File Close Win C Open Up Open Dow Reopen Sel Move Copy Reselect Check She z n 1 Version 1 of component users home training da_n card_reader my_dff has been writte 4 Message indicating the creation of anew component 2 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic The Schematic Editor Window The Schematic window for a new schematic comes up blank with the origin 0 0 set in the center of the screen A message in the Message window tells you that a new component structure has been create
31. 4 48 Exercise 2 Browsing the add_convert Component in the Component Hierarchy Window___ 45D Module 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 5 Module 5 Overview _ D 2 Lesson 1 Design Hierarchy and Functional Block 5 3 Hierarchical Design 54 Functional Blocks 5 8 Creating Functional Blocks gt 5 8 Lesson 2 Updating Instances on a Schematic_ _ ST Updating and Replacing Instances ___ SSSS S SSSSSSS SSCSFS S 12 Symbol and Instance Properties 5 14 Attribute Modified and Value Modified Properties CSCS 16 Update Options 5 18 Update Example 5 200 Generating a Symbol from a Schematic 5 2 viii Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Lab Overview __ 5 24 Lab Exercises____ 5 25 Print Out the Lab Exercises____ 5 25 Exercise 1 Creating the card_reader Functional Blocks___SSSSSSSS SS 26 Exercise 2 Updating an Instance 5 34 Exercise 3 Generating a card_reader Symbol _ 5 35 Module 6 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation____ _ 6 1 Module 6 Overview ____ 6 2 Lesson 1 Design Viewpoint Concepts__ __ CC 3 Design Viewpoint Conceptual View 8 4 Multiple Views of a Source Design ____ SSW 6 6 Viewing Layout Changes in the Simulator 6 8 Design Viewpoints Iconic View 6 10 Downstream Tools and Viewpoints _
32. Hidden xy Triplet y NonRemovable v Default For This Property Name OK Reset Cancel 3 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Adding Logical Symbol Properties Logical symbol properties are properties that are not attached to any design object on the symbol They free float If they are made Graphic they show up in the Symbol Editor window in the gold color If they are defined as Nongraphic they are invisible and the only way to see them is to generate a report on Logical Symbol properties Logical symbol properties are usually defined to hold information that is normally not to be seen by the end user In the example on the left the property AUTHOR is defined as a logical symbol property in order to identify the creator of the symbol Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 49 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Reporting On and Deleting Logical Symbol Properties e pulldown Report gt Object gt As Specified Report Object File Mode __ Attached Property _ Property me VP lt 2 _ Comment Add Replace No File __ Symbol Body m Logical Symbol File PROJECT da_report_file Pi __ Text Attribute in m Display in Window Click Here ae m Write to Transcript Set All Clear All Selected objects will be used unless handles are specified
33. Move Dialog Box Resize Dialog Box Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Session Setup When you click on a Session Setup icon or execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Setup gt Session the form to the left appears You can hide any number of out lying window areas such as the palette and softkey area in order to gain more work space in the session area In addition you can set the speed of the mouse click and specify how you want the working windows in the session area to be displayed If a dialog box appears in an area that blocks your view of information you can easily move the dialog box by taking the following steps 1 From any where in the Session area press the right mouse button and click on Move Dialog Box as shown in the illustration on the left page 2 Move the shadow box to a new location then click the select mouse button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 35 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 3 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files The Mentor Graphics environment provides a simple text editor that you can use to create and modify ASCII text files In this course you will use this editor to create and modify files that will customize the user interface Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 37
34. bus o Ifa ripper is installed backward an error occurs when a Check command is executed 4 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Manually Connecting a Wire to a Bus Automatic Connection When you attach a single wire to a bus or a bus to a single wire the Schematic Editor automatically inserts an instance of the 1X1 ripper from the MGC_GENLIB rip component Manual Connection When you instantiate a bus ripper then connect it to a source bus manually you must follow these connection rules 1 The bundle end must always be graphically connected to the bus you want to tap If you are connecting two buses together then the bundle end must be connected to the source bus the bus whose wires you want to tap 2 When you connect the wire end it must be connected to a single net that represents a single wire or a range of tapped wires destination bus If you are connecting a source bus to a destination bus sub bus the wire end must be connected to the destination bus The illustration on the facing page shows how the bundle and wire ends must be connected to a bus The bundle end must be connected directly to the bus you want to tap If the ripper is installed backward an error message is issued when you check your sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 17 Additional Editing Features Defining the Rule Property e Each RULE property must be unique e Con
35. 5 Select the area around the right most ripper symbol Notice that the R values are automatically converted to numbers from 0 to 7 6 Unselect everything on the sheet 7 Convert the R property values on the left most ripper symbol choose the SEQUENCE TEXT icon again 8 Change the Beginning Index Number to 8 9 Click the OK 10 Select the area around the left most ripper symbol Notice that the R values are automatically converted to numbers from 8 to 15 11 Unselect everything on the sheet 4 54 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Check the Sheet 1 Check the sheet using default check values You should see results similar to that shown in the following Check Status window i add_convert schematic sheet1 passed check 0 Check Sheet add_convert schematic sheet1 Check SymbolPins 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Overlap 0O errors 0 warnings Check NotDots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Closedots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Dangl 0O errors 1 warnings Warning Unconnected pins on P Instance s at Pin s 8 l Warning I 20 P 920 Check INIT Properties 0O errors 0 warnings Check Owner 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Instanc 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Net 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Fram 0O errors 0 warnings
36. 9 Page Up Pg Up can B Page Number as lt WEEN Ec Table of Contents Scroll gt 3 Clone Ee In Hex 3 Page Down Pg Dn Zoom a a Section iA Next Index Previous Section By Name N Text Search Search for softkey Allow compound or proximity No Yes Match upper lower case Order search result document list by lt amp Any case amp Priority Exactly Alphabetically 1 46 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Searching and Traveling in Documents You can travel around in INFORM documents to continue with your current subject matter or to find additional information by one of the following methods Icons in the title area Clicking on these icons enables you to travel to the table of contents index a previous page or the next page Popup menu or function keys Enables you to travel to the table of contents index a previous page the next page a particular page number or section or to pages and documents that you previously viewed e Hypertext links Enables you to travel to hyperlinked pages in the same document or in different documents Hyperlinks are color highlighted on color displays and outlined on black and white displays You click on the highlighted reference to move to that location The BOLD Browser incorporates a full text search index which is a list of words and their locations in the online library Wh
37. Add a MODEL Property a Click on the symbol body to select it b Adda MODEL property to symbol body by clicking on the ADD PROPERTY icon TEXT app PROPERTY Fill in dialog box as shown in the following illustration Add Property Highlighted property name will Eising Pepeni Keme be used unless new property Nee name is filled in below oa MODEL CLASS New Property Name Graphic AN Property Value schematic Graphic xy Nongraphic Property Type P Stability Switch y String oe Variable Visibility Switch xz Number z Fixed xz Visible y Expression Protected Hidden y Triplet D gt y NonRemovable Default For This Property Name OK Reset Cancel 3 76 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Notice that the Existing Property Name list contains names of properties that are typically owned by the selected object If the property that you want to add does not exist in this list type the property name in the New Property Name entry box In this case click on the MODEL entry in the Existing Property Name scrolling window Now you only need to change the Property Type when you are adding a property that does not exist in the list Make sure that you don t forget to change the Visibility Switch to Hidden c Click OK The Add Property prompt bar appears
38. Modify Property Stroke 1 Select a piece of property text 2 Draw the Modify Property stroke to bring up the Modify Property form Was the stroke easy to draw Did you get the right result __ 3 Enter a new property value and execute the form with the stroke Redefine the Shape of the Modify Property Stroke 1 Again drawa stroke to bring up the Quick Help on Strokes form Look for a stroke definition that you might not want to use The Select Area stroke is good choice because this can be accomplished by simply drawing a bounding box with the Select mouse key The stroke number sequence for Select Areais_ 2 Close the Quick Help on Strokes form with a gt stroke 3 Execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Userware gt Edit Source 4 Enter stroke_95123 in the entry box and press Return A 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises 10 11 12 The source text for the Modify Property stroke function comes up in an AMPLE Userware window Change the number in the first line from 95123 to 74123 Press the Right Mouse button and choose Compile The message All text compiled successfully should appear in the message window Activate the Schematic Window and select a piece of property text Draw a stroke and observe the Modify Property form come up Fill in a new value and execute the form or click Cancel Reactivate the AMPLE Userware window and double cli
39. When evaluations are turned on the REF property value of the I 1 I 4 instance changes to 74161_ref When property values change in the context of the design viewpoint and the annotated values are re displayed the property values are automatically recalculated Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 77 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Merging Back Annotations Design Architect MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Report Check View Help Measure Distance Protect Unprotect Highlight Unhighlight Group Wa aay Ungroup Change Group Visibility Change Compiled Pin Name Merge Annotations I All Reconnect Annotations Selected Clear Unattached Annotations Recalculate Properties Mark Property Value Generate Symbol Create Pin List e Property values that are merged are normally removed from the back annotation object e Property values are not merged if the stability switch is fixed or protected e Property values are not merged if the viewpoint is latched on an old version of the schematic 6 78 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Merging Back Annotations You can merge back annotations to the schematic sheet when you are using Design Architect in the context of a design viewpoint When a schematic sheet is open with back annotations displayed and schema
40. and the Yes button for Wrap to Window Width This controls the amount of characters on one line in the ASCH file Click OK Select the pulldown meu item File gt Import Click the Navigator button navigate to the file training da_n com notepad_text ascii select the filename then click OK The following text is imported into the new NotePad session This is a practice Notepad Editor session Within this practice session you will search for and replace text copy text move text delete text and undo the last action Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 71 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 8 Save the Notepad information to a file as follows a Choose Menu Bar File gt Save b Enter SHOME training da_n com myfile ascti c Click OK Searching for a String 1 Move the cursor to the top of the file by pressing Ctrl T You must position the cursor back at the top of the file each time you wish to search the entire file 2 Choose the Menu Bar Search gt Search menu path Notepad displays the Search dialog box Search for the string text by filling out the form as shown below 3 Click OK 1 72 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 4 Notepad highlights the word text after the word replace This is a practice Notepad Editor session Within this practice session you will search for a
41. net T match_group instance net p PARAM trace_shielding instance net z elec_class instance r net EA restrict instance 7 n t CONNECT terminator instance r net y BA source instance 7 net y p p m net_length instance z het mau D EIZE net_prio instance net PREDNE AON net_type instance 7 net net_order instance net Eo pcb_net instance r net SAVE pcb_pin_pad instance net DESIGN pcb_pin loc instance net 2 Enter file pathname pin_tp_req instance net N Se Ba FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F412 I Inealant AllAnan Aunt l Daniin Ma l RBannrt On Add Deana nan Chaa nillAAwin A Command Pop Windo EXP DEC E Read File Close Win File Name A replace v _OK Cancel 6 58 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exporting a Design Configuration Viewpoints can not be included within viewpoints If each member of a design team creates a viewpoint for testing a sub module in a complex design the viewpoints for the sub modules and their associated configuration rules and back annotation objects can not be directly included in a higher level viewpoint just by creating the higher level viewpoint The ability to export a design configuration from one viewpoint to another solves the problem descri
42. Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties y Additional Editing Features Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks y Working with Design Viewpoints y Component Interfaces and Registration
43. SSSSSSS SSCSC lt A How Viewpoints are Created __ 14 Lesson 2 Using the Design Viewpoint Editor _ 6 17 Invoking DVE ___ 8 18 Opening a Design Viewpoint G20 Default Window Arrangement _ 6 22 Setting Up for a Downstream Application 6 24 The Default PCB Setup 6 26 Tasks that can only be done with DVE 6 28 Adding Parameters to the Viewpoint 6 30 Search Path for Parameters 3 2 Defining Primitive Instances 6 34 Defining Visible Properties 6 36 Specifying Substitute Property Values 6 38 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 ix Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Connecting and Disconnecting Back Annotation Objects 6 40 Other Tasks that may be done with DVE__ GH 42 Schematic View Window 6M Opening Down into the Hierarchy 6 46 Referencing Objects in a Hierarchy 6 48 Back Annotation Window ____ 8 50 Importing and Exporting Back Annotation ASCII Files __ 5 2 Checking the Whole Design 6 54 Latching a Viewpoint 8 56 Exporting a Design Configuration 6 58 Lesson 3 Using Design Architect to Edit and Merge Back Annotations_____ 6 61 Editing in the Context of a Design Viewpoint ____S SCSCSS CSSCU L 62 Edit Mode vs Annotation Visibility 6 64 Annotations
44. Trag wv Min Width 3 MinHeight 2 gt 5 Verify v 6 Change 7 Click o Reset Cancel 5 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Generating a Symbol from a Schematic A symbol can be generated from a schematic by executing the Design Architect session pulldown menu File gt Generate gt Symbol or the Schematic window pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Generate Symbol Fill out the form as shown on the left 1 Make sure the component name of the component containing the schematic is entered correctly 2 Click the Schematic button 3 Enter the pathname of a component structure If the component does not exist at that location a new component structure will be created If a component structure by the specified name does exist at the specified location the new symbol is registered with that component structure 4 Choose the graphic characteristics of the new symbol by clicking Choose Shape 8 Verify the shape in this example the shape is box 9 Edit the shape In this case make the width greater than the height by entering 3 2 10 Execute the shape form 11 Execute the Generate Symbol form The new symbol is created and the symbol editor is opened so you can further edit the symbol When you are finished editing you must check and save the symbol This action may cause an existing schematic model to be marked invalid so y
45. Y Press Goto button to specify pathname Double click the component icon to see possible symbol choices below Click on symbol icon then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Using the Choose Symbol Option When you click the CHOOSE SYMBOL icon from the schematic_add_route palette the Choose Symbol dialog box is displayed as shown on the left The scrolling list contains the contents of the current working directory To move to another directory you can click the Goto navigator button This brings up another dialog box requesting a directory name You can type in the name and click OK The scrolling list now displays the contents of the specified directory You can select the component by clicking the Select mouse button on the component name the icon that contains the c You can also optionally select the symbol if you want to select a symbol other than the default by double clicking the C icon then selecting the correct symbol icon and executing the form The Filter button lets you filter out certain types of objects from being displayed in the Dialog Navigator Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 21 Creating a Schematic 2 22 The Active Symbol e Symbol of the last instance added to sheet e Displayed in the Active Symbol Window Design Architect iz Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Check Report View Help small design
46. _ref Pin Pathname Property Name Property Value Net Pathname Property Name Property Value K a e Annotations on Annotations on evaluations off evaluations on i i EA E 4 X A REF properties REF properties 6 76 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Expressions in Back Annotation Objects You can also place expressions in back annotation objects For example you may want to replace an expression of a property that is either attached to the symbol or the instance with a new expression that is back annotated to the attached property In this situation the display setting of the evaluation and back annotations is important If back annotations are displayed while evaluation is disabled you will see the unevaluated property value in the back annotated property If evaluation and back annotations are enabled you will see the evaluated back annotation value In the example on the facing page the my_design design the default design viewpoint and the schematic sheet for I 1 are the same as in the previous example Only the back annotation object has been modified such that the REF property value for the I 1 I 4 instance is now strcat COMP _ref When annotation are turned on the REF property value for I 1 I 3 becomes U1 and the REF property value for I 1 I 4 remains strcat COMP _ref
47. d Move the ghost image of the text to the location shown in the symbol diagram and click the Select mouse button f IN schematic E w Da Qoe The text schematic appears next to the symbol body Why is the schematic text visible if you specified that it be Hidden Add Parameters as Property Values Parameters are defined as values that are passed to variables in an expression from an outside source In the last exercise you defined four single variable expressions for the RISE and FALL properties on the Q and QB output of the schematic In this exercise you are going to attach property names to the symbol body that match the variable names in the expressions When the my_dff schematic gets evaluated by a downstream analysis tool the values assigned to the properties that are attached to the my_dff symbol will be passed to the expressions on the sheet so that the rise and fall times can be resolved to constant values Add the properties to the symbol body as follows 1 With the symbol body selected choose the following popup menu item Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 77 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Properties gt Add gt Multiple Properties 2 Enter the values as shown in the following dialog box Add Multiple Properties Enter Property Name Value Pairs Existing Property Name Selection from this list will be ignored Property Name QRISE _ zero
48. sheet 1 1572 1 8591 ___Schematic t my_difsheett Active Symbol ja Choose to get Symbol History List Active Symbol Window Choose Symbol a ma c H Next Symbol c A ee Add Active Symbol Replace Selected ie Open Active Symbol Open Component Window Activate Selected Hide Window i Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic The Active Symbol The active symbol is displayed in the Active Symbol window It can be set implicitly when you place or replace an instance on a sheet or explicitly when you change the active symbol For example if the last instance you placed on the sheet was MGC_GENLIB buf then buf is the active symbol The Active Symbol window popup menu shown on the left is defined as follows Choose Symbol Changes the active symbol to another symbol Symbol History Shows an ordered history list of previously active symbols You click on a symbol name in the list to make it active This list also contains common elements such as portin portout vcc and ground to provide a quick way to get to these parts Next Symbol Used for components which have multiple symbol models such as MGC_GENLIB rip Clicking this item changes the view to the next symbol in the symbol list Add Active Symbol Adds another instance of the active symbol to the sheet You can also click the Select mouse button in t
49. t have a viewpoint the downstream tool creates one automatically when the tool is invoked on the design Viewpoints can be created and modified with a tool called the Design Viewpoint Editor Design Architect can also invoke on a design viewpoint using the SET VIEWPOINT icon as well as a source schematic using the OPEN SHEET icon When you invoke Design Architect on a design viewpoint you may selectively merge back annotation information from the Back Annotation object onto the source schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 13 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 2 Common Elements of the User Interface Many applications in the Mentor Graphics environment share common elements This lesson introduces you to these common elements Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 15 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Window Buttons and Navigator Controls Maximize Close Window Press and Drag Menu Bar Minimize P Design Manager y M MG
50. 0 Errors 0 Warnings el i 1 K gt 1 If your check operation reports errors you can identify handle names by slowly clicking on the handle name in the Check Status window The object associated with that handle name is selected on the sheet 2 Close the Check Status window with a _ stroke 3 Save the schematic to disk by executing File gt Save Sheet gt Default Registration from the pulldown menu Design Architect MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Report Check Open Down Open Up Save Sheet Save Sheet As Print Sheet Export Graphics Set Edit Mode Off A Default Registration Change Registration Label Print Screen Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 69 Creating a Schematic Exercise 2 Net Connection Rules The following exercise will help you become familiar with the net connection rules The basic rule is that edit operations preserve the connectivity prior to the edit and do not make new connections You must explicitly make the connection after the edit operation 1 Draw the stroke to view the entire sheet then the 4 stroke to unselect all 2 Click on a single inv instance and draw a C stroke 3 Place the copy of the inv instance so that one pin touches a net Click the Left mouse button Notice what happens A not dot is displayed at that junction point to indicate that a con
51. A bundle has a net name in the following form Bundle 3 pixels Curly braces define a bundle on 1 6 an Bundle name Wire Bus To add a Bus Bundle ADD ROUTE a 22 ADD er BUNDLE Add Bus Bundle Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Creating a Bus Bundle Buses let you represent a collection of wires without drawing them individually Buses have a defined width derived from the number of elements in the bus The string Out 0 3 defines a bus with a width of four wires Each wire is referenced sequentially Out 0 Out 1 Out 2 and Out 4 through the array The most significant bit is on the left zero and the least significant bit is on the right 3 In Design Architect a net is defined as a bus when you add a NET property to a net vertex and assign a value as shown on the facing page The graphical rendering of a bus has no electrical meaning but is used to increase the readability of the schematic A bus is generally represented as a solid line that is three pixels in width instead of one pixel in width Bundles are a way to collect arbitrary set of wires buses and other bundles together on a single schematic The nets in a bundle do not need to be related to each other in any way other than they must exist in the same schematic A single net can be a member of any number of bundles however no two bundles can have the same name and different member sets Bundles
52. Menu Bar Setup gt Page Layout 2 Change the settings to match the figure above Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 79 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 3 Click OK The document window now displays two smaller 90 pages When you use the page up or page down keys you scroll 45 of the page To quickly change the layout you can press the F9 function key to view one page SHIFT F9 to view two pages and Ctrl F9 to view four pages Try this then return to the two pages up layout Using the Page Icons The BOLD Browser provides icons and key definitions to allow you to navigate within an online document The figure below shows the location of the page icons If you are located at the beginning of the document the previous page icon is not visible Similarly if you are located at the end of the document the next page icon is not visible Practice browsing the document by clicking the Page icons BOLD Browser w E MGC File Edit Search Setup Report Help Previous Next Page Page Turning Several Pages at a Time 1 Type turn 20 session turn 20 A popup command line appears with turn 20 in it 2 Press Return BOLD Browser turns the document forward twenty pages 1 80 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 3 Type turn 10 and press the Return BOLD Browser turns the d
53. N 24 for a net and P 26 for an instance pin System generated reports often refer to objects by their handle names The following exercise will show you how to quickly discover the handle name of an object 1 Click on one of the inv instances 2 Draw a square root sign stroke A report is generated that details the information about the object and related objects including the handle names The handle name for the selected inv instance is 3 Close the report window with a gt stroke and unselect the inv instance with a 4 stroke Check the Sheet 1 Choose the following pulldown menu item Check gt Sheet gt With Defaults The Check Status window should appear in a few moments and look like the following 2 68 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Check Sheet my_dff schematic sheet1 EN Check SymbolPins 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Overlap 0O errors 0 warnings Check NotDots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Closedots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Dangl 0O errors 0 warnings Check INIT Properties 0O errors 0 warnings Check Owner 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Instanc O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Net O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Fram 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff schematic sheet1 passed check
54. Properties __ Frames E Segments m Instances Symbol Pins __ Nets __ Comment Text E Pins m Vertices Reset to MGC Defaults Set All Clear All OK Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 71 Creating a Schematic 10 11 2 72 Click the Clear All button then click Vertices Draw a stroke to execute the form Now draw a selection box around two net vertices on a wire attached to the SET input of one of the latches Draw a shark fin stroke and move the cursor vertically to move the segment Click the Left mouse button to place the segment Drawa stroke again and place the segment in its original position Draw a U stroke 4 to unselect all Draw a stroke to bring up the Selection Filter form again Click Set All and draw stroke to execute the form This effectively disables the filter and allows you select any object simply by clicking on it Practice selecting various objects to verify that the filter is disabled Close the Schematic window when you are finished Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Exercise 4 Browsing a Component in the Component Hierarchy Window It is helpful to keep track of the hierarchical structure of your design The following exercise will introduce you to the use of the Component Hierarchy Window 1 Activate the DA Session window by clicking
55. V8 5 6 80 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotations and Reusable Sheets The design on the left has a root sheet with two latch instances I 1 and I 2 The LATCH component has a schematic with a nor instance I 1 The sheet is called reusable because it is used more than once in the design The logic on the lower sheet is also called repetitive logic The design is viewed by a downstream tool through a viewpoint called pcb_design_vpt and REF properties are applied through a back annotation object as shown in the window at the bottom of the illustration As seen through the eyes of the downstream tool the design appears to have two separate lower level sheets one sheet for I 1 and another sheet for I 2 As shown in the back annotation window REF properties U1A and U1B are applied to the nor gate on the lower sheet If the owner of this design decides to merge these annotations back to the source sheet at the end of the design cycle a conflict will occur because a property can only take on one value at a time In this case the REF property on the nor gate will take on the last value merged to it All other previously merged values will be overwritten The general rule is that if you decide to merge annotations back to the source sheet only merge annotations to non repetitive logic The alternative is to archive the source schematics the top level design viewpoint and the back annotation objects as a single
56. You should contact your system administrator about defining this environment variable and about the set of soft prefixes that your site supports Once your system administrator has set up a location map and has defined the MGC_LOCATION_MAP environment variable you should be able to use the soft prefixes you will find in this training workbook When you see an example that uses a soft prefix as part of an application command or as a response to an application prompt you can type the soft prefix just as it appears in the manual or substitute the corresponding soft prefix in use at your site If you experience any problems using soft prefixes contact your system administrator The search path for a location map is shown graphically at the bottom of the facing page The system always looks first for a pathname that is defined by the environmental variable MGC_LOCATION_MAP If not found it looks for a file named mgc_location_map in the current working directory then in the location MGC_HOME etc then in the location MGC_HOME shared etc As soon as it finds a map in this search the search stops and that map is used Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 53 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Object References PROJ_A my_design yoe B DT gt PROJ_A my_design txt UN 0 meem aT C lt
57. annotations off ____Schematic 274161___ I 3 I 4 A REF properties e Evaluations on Evaluations on off annotation off annotations on X 4 X 4 REF properties REF properties 6 74 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotated Property Evaluation continued The schematic under the I 1 instance of 74161 is shown on the left In the top window both annotations and evaluations are turned off to the REF property values appear as they were entered on the source sheet The REF property value for I 4 is an expression with an AMPLE string concatenation function When evaluations are turn on the REF property for I 4 is evaluated to the string 74161_U2 The value of the COMP variable is taken from the parent instance above When annotations are turned on the value of this REF property is replaced by MILS which is the value specified in the back annotation object Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 75 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Expressions in Back Annotations e Back annotation object has been modified Back Annotation default Instance Pathname Property Name Property Value A 1 1 1 3 REF U1 1 2 1 3 REF U2 I 1 I 4 REF strcat COMP
58. instance net Fi elec_class instance net A EA restrict instance net j CONNECT terminator instance net BA source ee net aaa net_length instance net HIER i i ARCHY COMP net_prio SENS net A WINDOW WINDOW net_type instance net T net_order instance rnet a T Lt pcb_net instance net SAVE pcb_pin_pad instance 7 net DESIGN pcb_pin_loc instance net A pin_tp_req instance net i K K F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Fii F12 Unselect A Open Dvpt Popup Me Report Ob Add Prope Open Sheel Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Close Dvpt Change Pr S Open Sele Read File Close Win Reopen Se Save Dvpt Reslect Check Des Delete Pro C Open Up Open Dow A 6 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation The Default PCB Setup The default PCB setup is shown on the left Notice in the Design Viewpoint window that a new back annotation object called pcb_design_vpt is created and opened In the Design Configuration window many visible properties are declared These properties will be visible to the PCB tools that use the Design File Interface to transmit and receive information The comp property is specified in the primitive list Because specific values of the comp property are not specified the value reads VOID This means that every instance in the design that has a comp property regardl
59. o Interrelated by containment or by reference Treated as one unit in the Design Manager Manipulate design objects as one operation Represented by a unique icon Creating manipulating configurations called design data configuration management Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Configuration Objects A configuration object contains a set of rules that allows you to define a collection of design objects and to treat them as one unit in the Design Manager The design objects in this collection are called a design configuration and they are interrelated by containment or by references A configuration object allows you to find all of the design objects that are associated with a design and operate on them as a single unit These operations include copy move delete release protected copy and lock Only copy and release are described in this module The design objects in a design configuration may be related by very complex paths of containers and references You might be able to recreate the relationship of these objects manually by navigating and selecting but the task would be difficult and lengthy In addition you would have to do this before every Design Manager operation The configuration object records all of the information needed to recreate the configuration instantly at a later time Like all design objects configuration objects are represented by a special icon You can m
60. oky Reset Cancel 6 56 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Latching a Viewpoint When a team is working on a design some team members may need to freeze or latch a design version in its current state so they can perform simulation or physical layout without seeing the daily changes made by others on the design source The latching mechanism prevents the currently referenced versions of objects from being deleted and specifies that only these versions should be used with the design viewpoint It also lets others continue with development on the original source while a frozen version is being used for simulation or layout Once a design viewpoint is latched the design will not use an updated version of the source design until you specifically update it You can latch a design viewpoint using DVE or QuickSim II The latching capabilities let you do the following Latch or freeze a version of every object referenced by the design viewpoint These objects include components models component interfaces VHDL source and back annotation objects Control the latching or unlatching of a specific sub trees or back annotation object This lets you specify when you want the design viewpoint to use the updated versions of the design or back annotation objects Update the entire design to use the latest component and back annotation objects T
61. you will merge back annotations onto the ADD_CONVERT source sheet so you must first unlatch the viewpoint 1 Selecting EDIT gt Latch Version gt Unlatch Version from the pulldown menu 2 Click the ALL button then click OK Save and Close the Viewpoint 1 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Save Design Viewpoint 2 Click the CLOSE VPT icon on the Setup palette 6 102 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exercise 4 Merging Annotations to the Source Sheet In this exercise you will use the Design Sheet editor in Design Architect to view back annotation properties in their evaluated and unevaluated states You will then selectively merge some of the properties onto the source sheet 1 In Design Architect open the card_reader design in the context of a design viewpoint by clicking on the SET VIEWPOINT icon a ae VIEWPOINT simiccm cren New viewpoimi Uneetviewpam card_reader wy i 1 Enter ick Cge E 2 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK After the viewpoint is set the following dialog box appears Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 103 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Open Design Sheet Viewpoint users train1 training da_n card_reader sim_vpt Source Sheet Sheet Name sheet1 Options Top Level Hierarchical Open Top Level Sheets
62. 1 I 2 gt 4 Instance handles g e Back annotation object L Instance Pathname Property Name Property Value I 1 I 3 REF U1 I 2 I 3 REF U2 Pin Pathname Property Name Property Value Net Pathname Property Name Property Value 6 68 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing and Editing Properties The example on the facing page and next few pages shows how back annotations are viewed and edited in Design Architect in the context of a design viewpoint The facing page displays the aspects of this example e A design named my_design has two 74161 instances whose handles are I 1 and I 2 e A design viewpoint called default which is associated with my_design e A back annotation object called default is connected to the viewpoint called default Version 1 of the back annotation object is displayed in the window at the bottom of the facing page The next page illustrates the results of displaying back annotation data on the schematic sheets associated with instances I 1 and I 2 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 69 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing and Editing Properties continued e From I 1 Before After Schematic 2 74161 I 3 I 4 A 4 REF properties
63. 2 Updating Instances on a Schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 11 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Updating and Replacing Instances e Updating o Reflects the Latest Version of the Symbol o May loose properties and property values depending on how the update occurs o Two Ways to Update o On OPEN SHEET you can choose whether or not to update the instances o While the Sheet is Open pulldown menu Edit gt Update e Replacing o Reflects the Latest Version of Another Symbol o Procedure o Select the Instance s o pulldown menu Edit gt Replace 5 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Updating and Replacing Instances Properties on an instance can be updated when a schematic sheet is opened and the instances on the sheet can reflect new and updated versions of the symbols if those symbols were updated since the last time the sheet was opened You can also manually update symbol instances one at a time by selecting the instance and choosing the Edit gt Update menu item This update process can delete some or all of the properties and property values you have placed and changed on a symbol instance depending on how the update options are set You can choose whether or not you want to automatically update all instances on an existing sheet when that sheet is opened in a Design Architect session If you do not update the sheet and the symbols ha
64. 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Implicit Ripper When you specify the Ripper setup to be Implicit the default the net is connected directly to the bus or bundle as shown on the opposite page Instead of a RULE property a NET property is used to specify by name which net is ripped from the bus or bundle Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 27 Additional Editing Features 4 28 Frames Graphical boxes that enclose a collection of circuitry Provide the ability to repeatedly or conditionally include a circuit in a design Used on schematic sheets only Number of iterations conditions controlled by parameters found in the frame expression Frame expression defined by the FREXP property Frame expression types o IF o FOR o CASE o OTHERWISE Choose ADD gt Frame Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Frames A frame is a graphical box that encloses a collection of circuitry Frames provide you with the ability to repeatedly or conditionally include a circuit in a design Frames are used on schematic sheets only The number of iterations or the conditions determining the inclusion or selection are controlled by parameters assigned in the frame expression The frame expression is the value of the FREXP property which is owned by the frame The frame expression uses similar constructs to those used in high level programming l
65. 3 REF U1B z SELECT Pin Pathname Property Name Property Value Pe COUNTS 1 1 1 3 0B RISE 10 ZOOM ZOOM IN OUT Net Pathname Property Name Property Value VIEW VIEW I 1 1 3 N 225 delay 7 AREA ALL mio Fo w e ADD DELETE PROPERTY PROPERTY 10 1i CHANGE CHG PROP PROPERTY ti CURSOR Feb sy RELOAD MODEL BE BE IMPORT XPORT ASCII BA ASCII B EZF SAVE A DESIGN 6 50 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotation Window A Back Annotation window may be opened on any connected back annotation object by selecting the object name in the Design Viewpoint window and choosing the popup menu item Open gt Back Annotation as shown on the left Annotations may be added changed or deleted by clicking on the appropriate icon in the EDIT palette as shown in the diagram Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 51 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Importing and Exporting Back Annotation ASCII Files 1 BACK ANNOTATION default HEADER 1 0 users PROPERTY REF insta PROPERTY RISE pin CONTEXT These annotations I 5 2 10 i 4 Po Back Annotation Object Back Annotation ASCII File 6 52 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Anno
66. 3 75 3 82 3 1 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 Overview Design Architect in the Framework Environment y Creating a Schematic y Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties y Additional Design Hierarchy and Functional Bloc
67. A schematic window is displayed in the Session window showing the add_convert schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 33 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Exercise 2 Updating an Instance This exercise will show you how to edit the my_dff symbol from the Schematic Editor Window Open the my_dff Symbol from the add_convert Schematic 1 Double click on the border of the my_dff instance The Open Down dialog box is displayed showing all the models that are associated with my_dff 2 Select the symbol model in the Available scrolling window and click OK A my_dff Symbol window is opened in the DA Session area Change Property Values and Attributes 1 Use the Modify Property stroke to change the QRISE and QFALL property values to 5 and 10 respectively 2 Move the locations of the QBRISE and QBFALL property values Check and Save the Symbol 1 Check the symbol then close the Check Status window 2 Save the my_dff symbol to disk 3 Close the my_dff symbol window Update the my_dff Instance 1 Make the add_convert schematic window active 2 Make sure the my_dff instance is selected then choose the following popup menu item Update gt Auto Notice that the new values and locations of QRISE QFALL QBRISE and QBFALL are reflected in the new instance Check Save and Close the add_convert Schematic 5 34 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Exerci
68. Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 51 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Soft Prefixes and Location Maps MGC LOCATION MAP 2 force SOUS TOM LIB t LLBRARY usr2 dbournette my_custom_parts SPROURGL usr2 dburnette project INCLUDE usrl team_project mgc_location_map MGC_LOCATION_MAP_1 SMGC_GENLIB Jusrl moelibs gen lib oe Pius me oe Wis 7a LIB SPROJECT usrl team project SMGC_HOME etc shared mgc_location_map qq SMGC HOME etc moc location map v mgc_location_map Search Path gt Vv MGC_LOCATION_MAP users dburnette my_map environmental variable Search Starts Here 1 52 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Soft Prefixes and Location Maps Soft prefixes are a Mentor Graphics mechanism for sharing resources such as parts libraries and project data among users on networks that might contain different types of workstations with different operating systems and configurations Soft prefixes make it possible for users to access these shared resources in the same way from any workstation on the network even though different workstations may require different hard pathnames to get to the same resource Your system administrator will set up and maintain the soft prefixes used at your site in a mapping file called a location map To give you access to this location map you may need to define the shell environment variable MGC_LOCATION_MAP
69. Check and Save the Sheet a The merged property values may turn back to the red color during a check sheet because Evaluations and Annotations are turned Note back on during a check sheet Close the add_convert window Notice that the annotated property values on the card_reader sheet are still displayed in red not merged The back annotations must be merged one sheet at time Close the card_reader window End of Lab Exercises Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 105 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 6 106 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 7 Component Interfaces and Registration Lesson Lab Exercises Creating a Second my_dff Schematic Reload the my_dff Instance on add_convert then Switch Models to schematic2 Creating a Second add_convert Component Interface Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 3 7 31 7 32 7 39 7 40 7 1 Component Interfaces and Registration Module 7 Overview
70. Commands 7 30 Lab Exercises_____ 7 31 Print Out the Lab Exercises 7 31 Exercise 1 Creating a Second my_dff Schematic_ _ 7 32 Exercise 2 Reload the my_dff Instance on add_convert then Switch Models to schematic2___ 7 39 Exercise 3 Creating a Second add_convert Component Interface_____ 7 40 Module 8 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 6 l Module 8 Overview 8 2 Lesson 1 Design References Review 8 3 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 xi Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Design Object References Copying Design Objects Moving and Deleting Design Objects Checking and Changing Design References Lesson 2 Creating a Configuration and Releasing a Design Configuration Objects Design Data Configuration Management Configuration Operations Versions Releasing Designs Lab Exercises Objectives Print Out the Lab Exercises Exercise 1 Exploring References Exercise 2 Verifying and Changing References Exercise 3 Creating and Copying a Configuration Appendix A Customizing Exercises Common Scopes in DA and QuickSim Command Window Lab Exercises Exercise 1 Creating a startup file for BOLD Browser Exercise 2 Creating a startup file for da_session Exercise 3 Add a Navigator Button to the Set Working Directory Form_ Exercise 4 Customizing the Modify Property Stroke Exercise 5 Add a Zoom to Previous Function Key Exercise 6 Fix this Broken Design Database 8 4 8 6 8 8
71. Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Setting Up for a Downstream Application The process to set up the design configuration for a downstream application is outlined as follows 1 Click the SETUP VPT icon 2 Click the button for the downstream tool you will be using 3 Click OK You can then watch the rules in the Design Configuration window being automatically defined Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 25 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation The Default PCB Setup 2 y hal MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help da_n card_reader pcb_design_vpt_1 J a Setup DESIGN CONFIGURATION 1 BACK ANNOTATION pcb_design_vpt 4 __ EDT BA Object Created UNSELECT SELECT ALL COUNTS E ZOOM ZOOM a ee IN OUT z z l VIEW VIEW Design Configuration r i ADEA ALL PARAMETER A Primitive Level PRIMITIVE Specified FT WPT comp lt VOID gt 4 OPEN ines CLOSE VPT SUBSTITUTE Visible Properties 5 VISIBLE PROPERTY Specified PRIM net_tp_min_clearance instance 4 SHEET een net_tp_req instance n net pcb_group instance 7 net E balance_pair instance nnet 7 rae match_group instance net T PARAM trace_shielding
72. Exercises___ 8 59 Exercise 1 Creating a Symbol____S S S SCSCSCSCSCSFSSSSS CL_ 3 0 Exercise 2 Adding Properties to a Schematic _ 3 70 Exercise 3 Adding Properties to a Symbol _ 3 75 Exercise 4 Browsing the my_dff Component in the Component Window_ 3 82 Module 4 Additional Editing Features__ 4l Module 4 Overview 4a Lesson 1 Additional Editing Features___ 4B Setting Up the Page Setting Up the Grids __ 4G Comment Text and Graphics 4B Add a Sheet Border 4 Creating a Bus Bundle ___ SSSSSS 4 Explicit Rippers 4 Manually Connecting a Wire toa Bus__SSSSSSSCSCSCSCSSSSCC 4 16 Automatic Connection ____ S47 Manual Connection____ SSS 417 Defining the Rule Property SB Setting up the Ripper Automatically Connecting a Bus Ripper 4 22 The Sequence Text Function 4h Implicit Ripper 426 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 vii Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Frames 4B Frame Example S 4 30 Repeating Instances 43 Selection Sets 44 Undo and Redo ___ sss 4 36 Reporting on Schematic Objects__ 4388 A Report Window Example SSS 440 Setting Check Levels for Sheets 442 Setting Check Levels for Schematics 4M4 Lab Overview 44 Lab Exercises____ 4A Print Out the Lab Exercises______SSS S S SSS SSFSSS CSFSSC S 47 Exercise 1 Creating a Hierarchical Design
73. File Close Win Reopen Se Move Copy Reselet_ 4 Read Message Open Dow a A e Property Name qbfall Value 0 Height 0 5 Justification center left Visibility visi 3 56 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Quick Report on Property Text A quick way to generate a report on unknown property values is to use the TE XT icon on the text palette The procedure is as follows 1 Click the TEXT button on the palette 2 Click the TE XT icon The Get Text Information prompt bar appears 3 Click on a piece of property text 4 Read the message about the text in the message window 5 Keep clicking on pieces of unknown text until you are satisfied 6 Click the Cancel button on the prompt bar to exit the Get Text Information mode Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 57 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 3 58 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Lab Exercises Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 59 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Exercise 1 Creating a Symbol In this lab exercise you will create the symbol for the s
74. INST property allows you to give a custom name to a particular instance CLASS Specifies special connector devices such as ports bus rippers offpage connectors and net connectors GLOBAL Specifies net connectivity without drawing the wires on a schematic Global connectivity is established both vertically and horizontally in the design hierarchy by giving nets the same name as the Global property value Examples are the MGC_GENLIB components vee and ground FREXP Specifies the frame expression of a Frame Frame expressions allow frames to be identified by type and value so that applications which use frames can interpret the information Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 35 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Class Property Values Property Value Description c Connector Connects differently named nets together g Global Connects a net both vertically and horizontally across a hierarchical design Port Defines an external net on a schematic Ripper Extracts a range of nets from a bus Off page connector Identifies nets by the same name that reside on different sheets of a schematic Null Defines an object as electrically inert Tells the system that a dangling instance pin or net vertex should not cause a check warning Examples ground portin lt z So pall NET netcon _ g p Ro o Ro B ce dangle _ offpag out pag 2X1 rip 3
75. In this case the value of the resistor is 10k ohms INST Used to give a unique name to this particular instance In this case the resistor is labeled R1 PINTYPE Specifies the direction of the pin Possible values are IN OUT and IXO This value may also be omitted Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 43 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common PCB Layout Properties e The following properties must be added in Design Architect in order for Board Station to map logical symbols to physical parts o All Symbol Pins must own a PIN_NO property o All Symbol Bodies must own a COMP property o All Symbol Bodies must own an instance specific REF property e The values for these properties can be assign for the first time or changed in Board Station e You can back annotate changed property values to the source schematic using Design Architect 3 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common PCB Layout Properties Board Station requires a minimum set of properties that must be attached to instances in order to map them to physical devices You must add these properties in Design Architect before you invoke Board Station tools on the design Although the properties must be defined and attached to the right owners assigning values to the properties may be done in Board Station When these values are assigned for the first time or changed in Board Station they are
76. Lab Exercises This concludes the lab exercises for Module 1 If you have time turn to Appendix A Customizing Exercises and do Lab Exercise 1 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 85 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 86 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 2 Creating a Schematic Lesson Creating a Schematic Lab Exercises Creating a Schematic Net Connection Rules Changing the Mouse Selection Filter Browsing a Component in the Component Hierarchy Window Browsing a Component in the Component Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 3 2 59 2 60 2 70 2 71 2 73 2 74 Creating a Schematic Module 2 Overview Design Architect in the Framework Environment y Creating a Schematic y
77. Manager E O MGC Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help Tools amc me Navigator an ra FT y A H j H qsim85inwp KELAY E E SETUP SETUP m m SESSION MONITOR L 3 Enter pathname of LJ local training directory ieee MONITOR bold_browser QuickPath 1 Click on Object Be T I z z z we vA 2 2 Draw C Stroke NAVIGATE M STOOLS with middle mouse button z T ccusim y ARCHY PONENT olal p aa CONFIG TRASH AIK ola Ui FastScan 7 COPY MOVE FlexTest Ai ad tui lam te lt A pip al 4 G EET 4 Click OK A il amp We wm i F7 Fe ry 4 eto F11 F12 J own M Command Pop Windo COP OB Destination users train1 training da_n Options of Cancel Read File Close Win 1 Copy operation was successful lt 4 _ 5 Look for message 1 50 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Copy Objects in the Navigator Window The illustration to the left shows the steps required to copy an object to another location in the directory structure An alternative to using the C stroke is to press the right mouse button and execute Edit gt Copy from the popup menu Design
78. Manual on Manual BOLD Browser User s Manual a Common Environment Variables Quick Reference Release A 1 F Common User Interface Manual Common User Interface Reference Manual 4 Customizing the Common User Interface Descision Support System DSS Reference Manual Vi OK Reset Cancel Help e Double click on a bookcase to list the manuals within e Select the manual and execute the form to open the document 1 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Opening Online Documents Online documents are grouped into bookcases When you choose File gt Open gt Bookcase the form illustrated on the left appears When you want to open a bookcase to view the documents just double click on the bookcase name To open a document double click on the document name All online training documents are contained in a bookcase named Training Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 45 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Searching and Traveling in Documents BOLD Browser Be MGC File Edit Search Setup Report Help Index S P L An se Search Previous Next Table of Page Page Contents Previous 4 8 Page lt A Document Area AS Next 2 6 Next Page Page v gt Previous Page Seroll
79. Name RISE Type expression OK Cancel 4 Click OK The top property value is changed the next to the top property value is selected and prompt bar reappears 5 Fill in the prompt bar as follows CHA PR V B H New Value QFALL Name FALL Type expression 0K Cancel lt gt 6 Click OK 7 Fill in the next prompt bar as follows CHA PR V B H New Value QBRISE Name RISE Type expression ok Cancel al gt 8 Click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 71 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 9 Fill in the next prompt bar as follows CHA PRVBH New Value QBFALL Name FALL Type expression 0K Cancel lt gt 10 Click OK 11 Unselect All before going on to the next step The results of this change should appear as follows PRE CLK CLR Check the 0 G CLR 0 EN Q n Fi Q QRISE n l IO QFALL 0 SET 0 Propery Values Changed to Expressions SET IO EN Q QB 0 QBRISE 0 QBFALL CLR 0 0 Sheet 1 Using the default checking level check your sheet for possible errors or warnings Check gt Sheet gt With Defaults 3 72 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Your Check Status window should look similar to the following
80. Names 1 Place the mouse cursor over the net name 2 Press Shift F7 Change Text Value function key 2 34 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Naming Nets You can easily name a net that currently has no name and you can rename a net that does have a name Remember all net names must be unique and all buses must have a net name In the illustration to the left the offpage connectors are added only to provide a visual indication that the net goes off the page The net name is the object that actually establishes the connection across the sheet borders You can use the NET gt Name Nets menu item to add new net names and to change existing net names This menu item works with selected nets selected vertices and selected net names or a combination of all three To quickly change an existing single net name you can use the Shift F7 function key Select the name press Shift F7 fill out the form and click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 35 Creating a Schematic 2 36 Selection Concepts Types of Selection o Point Selection click on object o Area selection press and drag bounding box Selection Modes da_session Setup gt Set gt Individual Selection Model o Additive selected object is added to the set o Individual selecting an object deselects others Ctrl LMB overrides and adds to the set Selection Sets o Objects are added to a selection set until an ope
81. Training Workbook V8 5 6 45 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Opening Down into the Hierarchy a MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help E 1 BA Open DESIG Close Design Viewpoint Save Design Viewpoint Back Annotation A Design Viewpoint Back Annotation Export Design Configuration Sheet Selected 2 Choose item m Down Design Configuration E Up gt x sheet1 RF_IN _CLR ANALOG Osc SERIAL_OUT 1 Select Instance OSC ADDRESS_IN FREQ DET _CLR ADDRESS_IN READ a l ACCESS 15 0 ADD_CONVERT schematic or Draw Stroke across instance to open down AGCESS CHK RED_LED DATA _BUS 15 0 HET GREEN_LED _CLR 6 46 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Opening Down into the Hierarchy The Schematic View window can only display one sheet of a schematic at a time however you may open as many Schematic View windows as you desire And like the Schematic Editor window in Design Architect you may open down into the design hierarchy The quick way to open down is to draw a vertical stroke top to bottom across an instance You may also use the File gt Open gt Down pulldown menu to open down into the selected instance Design Architect Training Work
82. altered on an instance at instantiation time Once instantiated the instance specific property value cannot be changed e Variable Values can be altered on an instance at instantiation time and through the Change Property commands e Nonremovable Values can be altered on an instance and changed through Change Property commands they cannot be deleted from the instance Other property attributes on an instance can be altered using Change Property commands Pin properties are assigned the values Visible and Fixed by default when the Pin property is created Properties other than pins are assigned Visible and Variable by default However you can override these switches at Add Property time in addition to changing the values of selected properties You can also change the default values through the Setup Property Text command discussed later in this module Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 33 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties SLD Properties e Structured Logic Design SLD properties are special properties used to define and pass connectivity information e The following list defines SLD properties and their owners SLD Property Owner Purpose NET Net Vertex Symbol Pin with a pin and net owner Establishes horizontal connectivity Symbol Pin The value defines the pin name Symbol Pin Defines which wire s get ripped from the bus Instance Body The value defi
83. any external references that point to the moved object are not updated that is they continue to point to a design object that no longer exists You need to understand the design well enough to decide whether moving the design will break external references The Design Manager allows all objects within the component container to be moved with the exception of symbols Symbols are not allowed to be moved outside of their owner component container It you attempt to move a symbol outside of its component container Design Manager issues an error message and does not move the symbol When you delete an object all objects and references in the containment hierarchy are also deleted Any external references that point to the deleted object are not updated and are therefore invalid that is they simply point to an object that no longer exists Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 9 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Checking and Changing Design References CHECK REFS a lib and2 omponent_lib and2 ea mag 8 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Checking and Changing Design References It is a good practice to always check for broken references before you invoke an application on design data that has been relocated You can check for broken references by selecting the icon in the Navigator window that represents the top root level of the desi
84. appear in the Active Component Window 6 Move the cursor into the Schematic Window and you will see a white image of the latch symbol following the cursor Position the instance in the middle of the window and click the Left mouse button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 63 Creating a Schematic 7 8 Unselect the instance by pressing the Middle mouse button and drawing a U stroke 4 Release the button A red U is displayed then the instance border color turns from white to blue The instance is now unselected Drawa stroke to zoom out a level Add Another latch Instance to the Sheet and Flip It 1 5 6 Draw an L stroke _ Again you will see a white image of the latch symbol the active symbol follow the cursor Before placing the instance move the cursor to the top of the window and double click the Middle mouse button This point on the sheet moves to the center of the window Move the cursor so that the bottom pin of the second instance is five grid locations above the top pin of the first instance Click the Left mouse button Flip the instance vertically by pressing the Right mouse button and from the popup menu choose Rotate Flip gt Flip gt Vertical The top instance of the latch is now flipped vertically Draw a U stroke 4 to unselect the instance Draw athe stroke to include all placed objects in the viewing area Add the buf Instance to the
85. assigned to owners that are not valid for the property name In Design Architect the following objects can own properties e Symbol Bodies Pertains to the symbol body graphics in a Symbol window e Symbol Pins Pertains to the symbol pins in a Symbol window or a Schematic window e Instance Bodies Pertains to instance bodies on a schematic sheet e Instance Pins Pertains to instance pins on a schematic sheet e Nets Pertains to wires or buses on a schematic sheet Comment Graphics Pertains to comment graphics in a Symbol window or a Schematic window Comment text cannot own a property e Frames Pertains to frames on a schematic sheet Because extensive property manipulation functions are provided you can manipulate the attached properties of selected owner object s This concept is discussed later in this module Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 27 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Types e A property value must have a property type 3 28 assigned to it Legal types are o String IN o Number integer real exponential 2 5 o Expression string or arithmetic x 5 o Triplet 3 valued property 5 10 15 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Types A property value must have a property type assigned to it A property type identifies the property value s data type The legal property types are e String An ASCII charact
86. basically a component structure just like any other library component You can create a functional block from the Schematic Editor as well as the Symbol Editor The advantage of using the Schematic Editor is that you can create a high level design on the fly without having to go to the Symbol Editor every time you want to create a new functional block The following list describes the steps required to create a functional block from the Schematic Editor 1 Create comment graphics select any of the icons in the schematic_draw palette Add symbol pins choose the ADD PIN S icon Add properties to the comment graphics Select only the Comment graphics and symbol pins on the block Choose Edit gt Make Symbol from the pulldown menu The results from this final step are A new symbol is created A new component structure is also created unless a component by the same name already exists at the specified pathname location The symbol is automatically checked using default check values If the symbol passes check it is saved and automatically registered with the default component interface You can explicitly define an interface if you use the command line syntax The newly created symbol is instantiated in place on the sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 9 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 5 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Lesson
87. captured in a back annotation file The back annotated properties may be merged back to the source schematic at a later time using Design Architect This process will be discussed in more detail in a later module Board Station requires that the following properties must be on logical instances in order to map them to physical devices e PIN_NO Specifies the physical pin number to which the logical symbol pin is assigned COMP Provides a unique name to help you identify the various components in a design An instance with a COMP property is considered primitive by the PCB layout tools REF Specifies which components are to be packaged together in the same physical package This allows you the convenience to design with single gates but then use a common REF property on those gates located in the same physical package Some components use the Uxxx designation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 45 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 3 46 Adding Properties to Symbol Graphics e Add properties to selected pins or symbol body e Add properties to logical symbol e Use the text palette Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Adding Properties to Symbol Graphics Properties c
88. click on the CONFIG icon This brings up a blank configuration window Drag Primary Entries into the Configuration Window 1 Reactivate the Navigator window and use the navigator buttons to display the contents of the your_path training da_n directory 2 Using the Select mouse button drag the following icons into the configuration window card_reader component_lib 3 Check the contents of the configuration window to make sure that you have three entries displayed in it These are called the primary entries Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 31 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Build the Configuration Normally you would set your build rules for each of the primary entries in the configuration window However in this exercise assume that the default build rules are adequate 1 Activate the configuration window 2 Choose the following menu item in the popup menu Configuration gt Build The message area contains the following information Working When the build is complete the configuration window contains the full build contents If you completed the build successfully the following information is displayed in the message window The Build operation was successful Save the Configuration Object After you have built a successful configuration and are satisfied that it contains the entries that you want you can save it for later use 1 Choose the following menu item Configuratio
89. create a schematic for a new component called add_convert The main purpose of this circuit is to receive a 16 bit serial address and convert the address to 16 parallel bits The circuit uses the my_dff component that you created in the last module and you will use components from MGC_GENLIB and a special component_lib in your da_n directory The purpose of this exercise is to give you practice developing a new schematic from scratch with very little direction This is a free form skill building exercise giving you a chance to become more proficient using strokes palettes and other DA user interface features The directions in this exercise suggest a strategy for developing the schematic but you may approach the task using a different methodology if you choose a gt PARITY and2 TEST vee a Dn READ o E Q ACCESS 15 0 a 74259 a 74LS161A if m E ore LEE JCLR E _CLR bao EA Tera e START LOAD x my_dif 5 A0 QH Q2 3 ENT RCO inv gt C gt CLK A1 Q4 12 A0 Q35 L ENP ToB ae E ay 4 4 pK O o D a7 Qa5 5 0 15 D Q6 6 PULSE re 868 i Q7 aise S C QC i D D _ CLR i no ADDRESS_IN amp gt invoco and2 inv y _ E and2 inv oo LATCH L_ L A 4 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features You will successfully complete this exercise when you have acc
90. design unit Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 81 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 6 82 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Lab Exercises Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 83 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exercise 1 Creating a Simulation Viewpoint In this first exercise you will learn how design viewpoints are created by using DVE to manually setup your own simulation viewpoint You will use the back annotation mechanism to globally control design wide rise and fall properties for a particular instance and you will used the DVE checking mechanism to perform design wide checks Create a Simulation Viewpoint 1 Bring up the Design Manager if you haven t already done so 2 Double click on the DVE icon to open the Design Viewpoint Editor 3 Maximize the DVE window then set the working directory to training da_n 4 Click the OPEN VPT icon 6 84 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation The Open Design Sheet dialog box is displayed NO _YES o 5 Fill in the information shown above then click OK Setup the View
91. designs contains two designs alu and counter The counter design has a symbol a schematic two viewpoints and two back annotation objects The viewpoint called default is assumed to be setup for QuickSim because this is the default name given for a QuickSim compatible viewpoint The back annotation object called default is assumed to go with the default viewpoint The name pcb_design_vpt is the default name given to a PCB viewpoint Notice that the viewpoint is a container itself that can hold objects and files which are specific to it In this case the default viewpoint holds a quicksim_setup object a quicksim_state object and a simview_setup object It could also hold a forces waveform database object that could be used as input stimulus for the design during a simulation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 11 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Downstream Tools and Viewpoints Design Architect Schematic Symbol gt Editor VHDL a Editor ie ae Editor p 4 Design i Electronic Design Viewpoint Data Model T Libraries _ Editor i x Viewpoint Viewpoint QuickSim QuickSim gt Viewpoint Viewpoint u ay wU N Board Station X J IC Station QuickSim oe 6 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Downstream Tools and Viewpoints The figure on the left shows how
92. execute the stroke to bring up the Modify Property form fill in the new property value then execute the form with a gt stroke This method is quick and easy but some people find this stroke difficult to draw especially with an optical mouse In this exercise your will change the Modify Property stroke from gt to gt which is much easier to draw You will then save this customization in you personal Design Architect userware file so it will always be there whenever you invoke the Schematic or Symbol Editor Invoke Design Architect and Open the my_dff Schematic 1 Invoke Design Architect from the Design Manager and set the working directory to HOME training da_n if you haven t already done so 2 Open the schematic for the my_dff component a Click on the FIND COMP icon FIND COMP The Navigator comes up b Select the my_dff component and execute the form The Schematic Editor is invoked on the my_dff component c Click the Maximize button to fill the session area with the schematic d Execute the gt stroke to position all the elements in the view area Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 17 Customizing Exercises Look on the Stroke Chart to find Modify Property 1 Drawa stroke to bring up the Stroke Help Chart 2 Look for the Modify Property stroke The stroke shape is The stroke number sequence is__ 3 Draw the stroke to close the form Try Using the Default
93. is made or the next time the sheet is opened There are several methods of placing component symbols on a schematic sheet You can access component libraries through either the schematic_add_route palette the ADD popup menu or the Libraries pulldown menu You will learn some of the more common methods to choose a component symbol in the next several pages Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 17 Creating a Schematic Mentor Graphics Libraries Popup Menu hans 2 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Mentor Graphics Libraries A variety of Mentor Graphics libraries are available for creating schematics The most common is gen_lib which contains models of common logic elements without technology specific property values Other libraries are available such as Is_lib which models the 7400 series Is family Mentor Graphics libraries can be accessed through the LIBRARY icon as shown on the left Once you are in a library the list of components can be very long You can use the popup menu to added scroll bars to the palette to help you scroll through the list Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 19 Creating a Schematic 2 20 Using the Choose Symbol Option th gt CHOOSE SYMBOL Click Icon 4bit multi and12 and16 and2 and2 n and3 and4 and5 and6 7 L lala ol o aoa a olo
94. lower case Order search result document list by o Any case o Priority y Exactly y Alphabetically Match variant forms of hyphenated words Match plurals amp other word forms Use personal thesaurus No Yes Restrict search to these fdocuments All documents Pick bookcases All open documents Pick documents Restrict search to these fields All fields Choose fields OK Reset Cancel Word Lookup Help 2 Enter softkey in the Search for text entry box 3 Click on Match plurals amp other word forms since there are probably instances for the plural form of softkeys also 4 Click OK The BOLD Browser indicates it is searching for the word and then displays a Search Results window displaying a list of documents in which the terms softkey and softkeys were found 1 84 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 5 Select the Design Manager Reference Manual item for which there are seven hits A hit is an occurrence of the search text found in a document 6 Click on the Visit button You can see a black arrow and line that indicates the exact location of the searched text 7 Close the document window and select and visit other hits in other documents 8 You can end the application session at any time by double clicking on the window menu button End of
95. lt _ Contain gt Higher p 5 GEVEIS a m gt 4 pOK Design Viewpoint Yes QB Parameter List j y A 2 Move up to next hierarchical level T 6 in the design Technology File bS Pa Library Technology File v Doo Owner a Back Object 1 Annotation Files 2 Start Evaluation 6 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Search Path for Parameters When the design is evaluated in the context of a design viewpoint and the system finds an undefined variable in an expression it starts a search up through the design tree to find a value for that variable The figure on the facing page illustrates the search path the system uses to find the value As soon as a valid value is found the search stops The search is described as follows 1 2 The property owner object net instance pin or instance body is search first If the owner in the above step is an instance pin the body properties of the attached instance are searched next If the owner is a net this step is skipped The body property list of the instance s component interface table is searched next If the owner is a net this step is skipped Does the design have more levels of hierarchy If yes the search moves up one level to the parent instance on the upper sheet The properties on the instance body are checked first then the body property list of the instance s component int
96. model type gt rm unregister_model lt model entry gt OR um lt model pathname gt lt model type gt add_label lt model entry gt lt label gt al delete_label lt model entry gt lt label gt d1 label_models lt existing label gt lt label gt 1m dff dff gt 7 30 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Lab Exercises Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 31 Component Interfaces and Registration Exercise 1 Creating a Second my_dff Schematic In this first exercise you will view the component structure of the card_reader circuit from the Component window then view the content of the my_dff component interface You will then the create and register a second schematic for the my_dff component View the card_reader Component Hierarchy and Interfaces 1 From the Design Architect session window verify and or set the working directory to training da_n 2 Click the COMP WINDOW icon 3 Click on the card_reader component then click OK 4 Click the Maximize button to fill the session area with the Component Window Maximize JF 5 Double click on the component icon at the top of the Component Information window The structure under the card_reader component is displaye
97. mouse pointer to the schematic2 window then click the left mouse button 4 Draw a View All stroke then and Unselect All stroke Add Two Inverters to schematic2 in the PRE Wire Path 1 Maximize the schematic2 window 2 Add two inverters to the PRE wire path as shown in the following diagram 7 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration PRE gt inv gt O inv O inv OE l 0 olL 0 0 0 0 CLR EN D E QO IO 0 SET 0 SET IO CLK EN 0 0 CLR CLR ai Of 0 0 Check the Sheet oo Q QRISE QFALL O QB QBRISE QBFALL You should see 0 errors and 0 warnings in the check results window If you get an overlap error move your portins and inverter further left so that the inverter does not overlap the boundaries of the left my_dff instance When your sheet passes all checks close the Check Status window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 37 Component Interfaces and Registration Save the Sheet and Add a Custom Label 1 Choose the pulldown menu File gt Save gt Change Registration Label po po OK Reset Cancel 2 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK This registers the new schematic2 model with the component interface named my_dff and adds the label low_speed Verify that schematic2 was Properly Registered 1 Cho
98. mouse to graphically draw the command For example to unselect all objects in many applications you press and hold the Drag Stroke mouse button and then draw a U on the screen The U will show graphically on the screen in the default stroke style and color normally a narrow red line When you have finished drawing the U release the Drag Stroke mouse button The command executes immediately and all objects are unselected A stroke is defined by a sequence of grid coordinates as shown in the figure on the left This grid is called the stroke recognition grid When you draw a stroke the pattern is overlaid on the recognition grid and a sequence of numbers is derived If this sequence matches an existing defined sequence the command for that sequence is executed If the sequence is not defined you get a not defined message In the example on the left if you draw the U stroke the pattern is interpreted as the number sequence 1478963 This is mapped to the function stroke_1478963 which is defined as Unselect All If you draw a stroke a quick help chart on the available strokes appears as shown on the following page Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 29 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Quick Help on Strokes Quick Help on Strokes Text Window Strokes Dialog Box Strokes Copy Paste from Clipboard fe rend 3214789 I 258 4 Can
99. now connected to the Simulation viewpoint It is also still connected to the Layout Tool viewpoint and can continue to receive changes made by the person doing the physical layout Notice that the Layout Tool Back Annotation object is connected in read only mode The person using the simulator now sees the changes being proposed by the Layout Tool and can test the affects on circuit performance but cannot make changes to the Layout Tool Back Annotation object The figure at the bottom of the page shows what the simulator see Dealing with conflicting change It is possible that in a situation like the one on the left that a change is made to the same property on two different back annotation objects In these situations the object connected last has the highest priority In the illustration the simulation BA object has the highest priority and takes precedence over any conflicting changes that may occur between the connected BA objects Dealing with a Diverging Design With many people making changes to a design in parallel the design tends to diverge rather than converge It is up to the team members to meet at regular intervals and synchronize the viewpoints This is a process where the team members decide which changes are valid The valid Layout changes like the reference designators on the Simulation BA object are selectively exported then imported to the Layout Tool BA object Likewise the timing change on the Layout Tool
100. o i E EN a A QB 0 v 0 0 0 CLR 0 0 my_dff Schematic Diagram Invoke Design Manager and Set the Working Directory 1 Log into your workstation if you haven t already done so 2 Invoke Design Manager from a shell MGC_HOME bin dmgr 3 Click the Maximize button to fill the screen with Design Manager 2 60 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Note some window environments may have a menu choice that performs this function 4 Set the working directory to the the following path lt home_directory gt training da_n card_reader MGC gt Location Map gt Set Working Directory Enter the above pathname and click OK Invoke Design Architect 1 Activate the Design Manager Tools window and invoke Design Architect a Click on the Tools window The border color turns blue b Double click on the design_arch icon design_arch If you don t see this icon press the Right mouse button and execute Update Window Use the left scroll bar if necessary to view the icon After you double click the icon the message Invoking Design Architect appears in the message window below c Click the Maximize button to fill the screen with Design Architect Maximize d Verify the setting of the current working directory MGC gt Location Map gt Set Working Directory Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 61 Creating a Schematic It should r
101. of that sheet in any design Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 63 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Edit Mode vs Annotation Visibility St Design Architect MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Report Check View Help Open Down gt Open Up Save Sheet Save Sheet As Apply Edits Print Sheet Export Graphics Set Edit Mode Off Select Window Annotations On Annotations Off Properties edited Properties edited on back annotation jon schematic sheet object Properties edited Properties cannot on back annotation be edited on any object sheet objects e A parent instance with a Source_Edit_Allowed property set to false locks the schematic underneath for edit 6 64 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Edit Mode vs Annotation Visibility There are three menu items that control whether properties are added or modified on the schematic sheet or to the back annotation object when you are editing in the context of a design viewpoint The File gt Set Edit Mode On Off menu items control whether properties or property values are editable on the schematic sheet The Setup gt Annotations Evaluations gt Toggle Annotations changes the current state of editing to either editing back annotated data annotations are on or editing the schematic sheet annotations are off The set
102. one of the Report gt Object gt Selected menu items the resulting report provides information on the selected objects in the active window The report is generally displayed in a popup message window and is also placed in the transcript by default If you select the Report gt Object gt As Specified menu item a Report Object dialog box is displayed The Report Object dialog box displayed on the facing page in the Schematic Editor lets you report on several types of objects attached pins attached properties instances nets pins vertices comments properties and text attributes Or you can report on specific handles If you type in a handle name in the Handle text entry box another Handle text entry box appears You can type in as many handle names as you want to specify If you type at least one handle name this takes precedence over the object types you selected at the top of the dialog box You can also change the default report options window transcript and file mode that are used for this report Every graphical comment and electrical object has an associated handle A handle is a unique system defined identifier A handle consists of one of the following key letters followed by the dollar sign character and a system assigned number C comment F frame I instance N net P pin T property text and V vertex The Symbol Editor dialog box is similar to this dialog box except it has different types of ob
103. owner Select gt Property Owner o By text Select gt Area gt Property o By name Select gt By Property gt Name e Commonly used icon and stroke text palette stroke CHANGE VALUE Modify Property e Commonly used popup menu items o Change Values o Change Height o Change Attributes 3 52 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Changing Property Values Selecting Properties When you change a property value or attribute at least one object must be selected The object can be the owner of the property such as a net vertex a pin or an instance body You can also change property values and attributes by selecting the property text itself In the example on the facing page you choose the Select gt Area All gt Property to select the property text in a bounding box Finally you can select property text by specifying the property name You choose Select gt By Property gt Name then specify the property name Changing Property Values A quick way to change a property value after it is selected in to click the CHANGE VALUE icon or draw the Modify Property Stroke Changing Property Attributes Changing property attributes such as height is more easily done by using the popup menu items Three choices are shown on the left Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 53 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Setting Up Property Text Attributes
104. pointer is visible In the Symbol Editor symbols are created according to the measures of the pin grid and scaled when instantiated on a sheet In the Schematic Editor instances are scaled to fit the current pin grid as defined by the pin spacing of the schematic being edited Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 7 Additional Editing Features Comment Text and Graphics e Provides non electrical information e Non property text that has no owner or name e Comments on sheets o Sheet border and title blocks generated at sheet creation time and Edit gt Add Sheet Border o Created other comment object with Edit gt Edit Commands gt Add Comment o Convert electrical objects to comment objects o Cannot convert back unless you undo e Comments on a symbol o Add symbol graphics and text then Convert to Comment o Comment text is not displayed with instance symbol text is o Can convert back but not everything is reconverted 4 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Comment Text and Graphics When creating schematic designs you often need to place design reference information and notes on the schematics or create borders and title blocks for the design To place this non electrical information into your design you use comment text and graphics Comment text is non property text that does not require an owner or a name Examples of comment objects include a sheet
105. sometime a DeMorgan equivalent symbol As shown on the facing page you can create addition symbols by specifying a different symbol name in the Open Symbol dialog box Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 21 Component Interfaces and Registration Registering More than One Symbol A TRAINING da_n my_df a my_dff Default tu ANSI P mybaff part gt schematic schem_id gt sheet J schemaitc2 schem_id sheet 2nd Symbol Registered Graphical Models STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff tt STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff ANSI A default_sym Function Models TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic schematic schematic default TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 schematic2 schematic2 Sil re eee a eee O CLK PRE CLR Q QB A qfall 0 qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 model schematic a Sick E 7 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Registering More than One Symbol The illustration on the facing page shows the results of registering more than one symbol to a component interface Any one symbol can only be registered to one component interface at a time and if more than one symbol is registered to the same component interface the symbol pins pin
106. symbol model associated with it Functional Model schematic Describes the functional behavior of the electronics being modeled More than one functional model may be present A non schematic functional model is called a primitive Each functional model must have input and output ports that match the input and output pins on the symbol Component Interface Acts as the control center for the component structure This design object takes the form of a table that collects and retains information about the symbol pins symbol body properties and each functional and timing model associated with the component Placing a model in the model table of the Component Interface registers the model with the component Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 7 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Component Structure Iconic View ep s r_latch i rit part s r_latch schematic Contains the Component Interface cs table IH schem_id _ sheetl e Component Icon represents the directories and files in a component structure e Design Object Icons represent other objects within the component structure symbols schematics sheets e Part Object a binary object that contains the Component Interface table 1 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Component Structure Iconic View Your design data i
107. that are explicitly selected are also added to the open selection set The open selection set becomes closed when objects are manipulated by commands like Move Copy and Rotate After the command is executed a new selection set is opened for the next selection You can access the contents of the closed selection set by invoking the Reopen Selection or Reselect commands When you do the contents of the closed selection set are added to the contents of the current selection set this selection set could be empty Each sheet or symbol opened in a Schematic Editor or Symbol Editor window has its own open selection set and closed selection set Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 35 Additional Editing Features Undo and Redo e Undo reverses the previous undoable action schematic_palette ELG UNDO Undo Redo from popup menu reverses the previous undo e DA supports more than one level of undo and redo Default level is set to 5 Not all functions are undoable 4 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Undo and Redo Undo reverses the action of the previous function called in any window within a Design Architect session You can click the UNDO button on the palette or draw the undo stroke shown on the left page to undo a previous action The default number of undo levels is 5 You can change the undo level by choosing the Setup gt Other Options gt Und
108. the design again by executing the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Check Design Notice that the Warnings have gone away concerning the lack of models for the three empty blocks 2 Close the Report window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 89 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Open the add_convert and my_dff Schematics 1 Open the schematic under the ADD_CONVERT instance by drawing a vertical down stroke across the instance Sheet 1 of the add_convert schematic appears in a new Schematic View window The root schematic view is underneath the new window Open the schematic under the my_dff instance by drawing a vertical down stroke across the instance Sheet 1 of the my_dff schematic appears in a new Schematic View window Click the minimize button on the Design Viewpoint window top left window Unselect All From the pulldown menu choose MGC gt Setup gt Session Click the Quadrant Tiling button in the Window Layout area then click OK The three Schematic View windows and the Design Configuration window should now be completely visible Add RISE and FALL Values to the INV instances In this step you are going to add a variable to the rise and fall property values for every INV instance in the design You are then going to globally control the values by defining parameters in the viewpoint PARAMETER rule 6 90 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Desig
109. the right entry box To save time typing you may just specify a pathname segment For example in the illustration on the left the broken reference was created by someone changing the component_lib directory name to lib You may fix this broken reference by replacing the pathname segment lib and2 with component_lib and2 The important thing to keep in mind is to make sure that the pathname segment is unique so you won t be changing similar correct pathnames in other branches from right to wrong It is a good practice to always repeat the CHECK REFS operation until the message No broken references were found is reported Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 61 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 62 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lab Exercises Installing the Training Data Before attempting to perform the lab exercises in this module make sure that the design data for this Design Architect training program has been installed on your network The training data should be at the following path MGC_HOME sharedftraining da85nwp If you can t find the design data contact you system administrator for assistance or refer to the Mentor Graphics manual titled Installing Mentor Graphics Software for Falcon Framework Products Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to h
110. the same functionality and the Active Symbol window contains a subset of the functionality available in the Schematic Editor The Symbol Editor window contains two grids The coarse grid with the marks is the Pin Grid Symbol pins must fall in this grid The fine grid is the Snap Grid Symbol body graphics can be snapped to this grid Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 9 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties The symbol draw Palette e Used to draw symbol body graphics e Used to add pins to the symbol 3 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties The symbol_ draw Palette The symbol_draw palette is the primary palette used to draw symbol body graphics and add pins to the symbol You can draw a rectangular body or any shape consisting of line segments arcs and circles The following table shows the number of location points and the mouse actions required Graphics Polyline Prompts initial end segments 2 minimum Click at initial point click at end of each segment Double click to terminate Rectangle diagonal corners 2 Press at one corner drag release to define opposite corner of rectangle Arc initial end arc 3 Click at each end then at arc point Polygon polygon points 3 minimum Click at each point of polygon double click to end segment from last to first point is automatically drawn Circle c
111. then be used as a place to save the QuickPath setup object and analysis reports Interactive Mode This mode allows you to custom create your own design viewpoint using the Design Viewpoint Editor You can also invoke DVE on an existing design viewpoint and add further customizations of your own Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 15 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 6 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Lesson 2 Using the Design Viewpoint Editor Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 17 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Invoking DVE fer MGC Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help 1 Double Click i Tools po luser train1 K Navigator T A Ma Se E saa r ee training my_dff m J MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Helin 2 Maximize Window Notepad Cleanup Windows aew Userware 3 Verify Working Directory E a UNSELECT SELECT Transcript ALL COUNTS Setup ZOOM ZOOM r IN OUT Design Management JIEN VIEW Location Map E Set Working Directory ee Print Screen Show Location Map Change Entry PEN ea Read Ma
112. think of the scope structure as an apartment building with several floors Each apartment is a scope and has a scope name The building is unique in that a person in an upper apartment can look down and see everyone in the apartments below but a person in a lower apartment cannot see into the apartments above Each scope typically represents a window in the application For example the schematic scope represents the Schematic Editor window the symbol scope represents the Symbol Editor window and the da_session scope represents the DA Session window Sometimes in between scopes are defined to hide some functions from a tool For example a function like add_pin may be defined in the da_window scope rather than the da_session scope because the VHDL Text Editor scope hdtxt_area would not understand the meaning of the function Some functions like set_working_directory are loaded into a lower scope like session_area so that all applications can see them If you viewed the structure from above it would look similar to viewing the window structure of an application with the outside windows like da_session being broader in scope and the inner windows like schematic being narrower in scope When an application like Design Architect is invoked AMPLE functions get loaded into the different scopes from the master tree The system then searches the HOME mgc userware tree for your custom userware In this case when DA is invoked the custom fu
113. underneath Any component labeled primitive means that the component has no schematic The popup menu allows you to also select a component then generate a report on its characteristics or open the Schematic Editor or Symbol Editor on it Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 55 Creating a Schematic Using the Component Window gt ELE COMP WINDOW c users train1 training da _ OO OO my_dif_ usersitraini training da_nicard_readerimy_dff Functional Models E my_ OH Derant users train1 training da_n card_reader my_dff Part schematic 1 c 1 schematic A schematic schem_id default gt sheet1 A Component Interface gt Selected Hide Show Contents Hide Models List Hide Pins List A Hide Body Properties List Select Be Add Components Remove Selected Components Fitering i ee List Font lt Remove All Components Part Interface Font gt Edit Setup E Colors Y Search List Layout Report List Area Write Default Startup File 2 56 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Using the Component Window Clicking the COMP WINDOW icon in the DA Session palette brings up a Component Window on a component you specify The Component window is a graphical view into the intern
114. 1 2 10 11 12 Activate the Notepad window if it is not already active Choose Menu Bar View gt Show Line Numbers Select the first sentence by placing the mouse cursor on the first character then press the left mouse button and drag across the sentence AEE EGEE LORN LM Within this practice session you will search for and replace text copy text move text delete text and undo the last action Click the Select mouse button at the end of line 3 to move the insertion cursor Move the sentence by drawing a shark fin stroke The block is moved and remains highlighted Move the insertion point back to the beginning of line 1 click there Copy the highlighted text back to the beginning of the file by draw a C stroke C The block is copied and the copy is highlighted Undo the copy action by drawing an up side down U stroke y The highlighted text is removed Undo allows you to reverse up to ten 10 edit actions you have made during the session beginning with the most recent edit action Select the sentence that you moved to the end of the paragraph dea mis practice st session you will search for and replace ext and undo the last action Note pad Editor session Delete the selected text by drawing a D stroke _ Select the word practice in the first sentence of the paragraph Type temporary The word practice is replaced by the word temporary Design Architect Trai
115. 2 4 Creating a Schematic Invoking Design Architect Design Manager oi MGC Obiect Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help m 1 Double Click T UA EE Ta 2 H n on faau h f kaaa a mE cnr SETUP SETUP i d SESSION ONITO training my_d design_arch DVE Z f ll Design Architect J Navigator MGC File Setup Help 2 Maximize Window Notepad Cleanup Windows Userware 3 Verify Working Directory Transcript Setup There is no active symbol Design Management Location Map DI Set Working Directory session_palette Exportt Screen Show Location Map Change Entry cane Read Map A SHEET X SYMBOL he 4 Click Here alta to Open Sheet ees EEE ARCHY COMP WINDOW WINDOW F2 F3 F4 F9 F1 F5 F6 F7 F8 F10 F11 F12 Open Shee Open Desi Popup Me Open Sym Open VHD Find Comp Toggle Tral Setup Ses Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Read File Close Win ran Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Invoking Design Architect You invoke Design Architect from the Design Man
116. 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Class Property Values The CLASS property tells the system what kind of connection or connector the owner represents The different CLASS property values are defined on the left Examples of the different connectors are shown below the table Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 37 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 3 38 Examples of Global Nets CNT Se PIN OSF YV SPACE mee CLASS ground GLOBAL Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Examples of Global Nets ground The ground symbol on the left defines a global net named ground for the design The CLASS property is attached to symbol body The value g tells the system that the instance represents a global net The GLOBAL property defines the net name which is ground The PIN property specifies the name of the pin and is a required property the value is SPACE but it could be defined to be any string The INIT property is attached to the pin and tells the simulator to initialize the pin with a logic O zero with a strength STRONG and a force type of FIXED It is common to initialize a global net to a constant value but this is not a requirement VCC The VCC symbol is similar to the ground in that a CLASS property with a value of G is attached to the symbol body Notice the value can be upper or lower case The valu
117. 5 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Functional Blocks When a design team creates a complex design like an ASIC it is useful to create functional blocks at the higher levels so the design can be divided into self contained portions that each team member can develop and simulate separately Functional blocks are typically represented by rectangular symbols that represent a grouping of high level functionality Below a functional block may be a behavioral model a schematic with more functional blocks or a detailed lower level schematic composed of library parts The whole design can be simulated and checked at various level of development if the undeveloped functional blocks are supported by behavioral models that closely match the intended functionality of the circuit Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 7 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Creating Functional Blocks e You can create functional blocks by using o The Symbol Editor o The Schematic Editor e Creating a Block from the Schematic Editor o Add Comment Graphics Symbol Pins and Properties o Select All Elements of the Block o Choose pulldown Edit gt Make Symbol o Symbol is automatically o Checked o Registered o Saved o Instantiated in Place 5 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Creating Functional Blocks A functional block is
118. 8 10 8 13 8 14 8 16 8 18 8 20 8 22 8 25 8 25 8 25 8 26 8 29 8 31 A 1 A 2 A 4 A 7 A 9 A 14 A 15 A 17 A 20 A 22 xii Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 About This Training Workbook Introduction About This Training Workbook Introduction This Design Architect Training Workbook is for users of Design Architect who have some knowledge about schematic drawing and electronic design and are familiar with the UNIX environment This training workbook is designed to provide you with concepts and instructions on how to use Design Architect to create schematics and symbols and how to use the Design Viewpoint Editor to create and configure design viewpoints Some instruction on customizing the Design Architect user interface is also include Installing the Training Data Before attempting to perform the lab exercises in this module make sure that the design data for this Design Architect training program has been installed on your network The training data should be at the following path S MGC_HOME shared training da8S5nwp If you can t find the design data contact you system administrator for assistance or refer to the Mentor Graphics manual titled Installing Mentor Graphics Software for Falcon Framework Products Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Trai
119. 8 5 Creating a Schematic The Open Sheet Dialog Box You click on the OPEN SHEET icon to open the Schematic Editor Window If you specify a pathname for a component that doesn t exist Design Architect will create a new component structure by that name at that location Design Architect will then open a new blank schematic sheet for that component If the component exists it is often easier to click the Navigator button navigate to the component location select the component icon and execute the form The sheet name is automatically set to sheet1 by default You can create additional sheets later by changing this name before you execute the form Clicking Options allows you to specify other tasks such as e Edit a sheet in another non default schematic model Create a new schematic model and or a new sheet that contains a sheet border and title block information You can also open the sheet in edit mode read only mode or display the component hierarchy a If you provide a relative component pathname that does not begin Ry with the dollar sign character that relative pathname will be Note converted to an absolute pathname based on the value currently set for the working directory If it is not set properly the new component structure may be created in a location that you did not intend Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 7 Creating a Schematic The Schematic Editor Window Design Architect
120. ATA_BUS 0 respectively Consider the following RULE property value example 63 60 34 45 0 3 In this example 10 wires from a 64 bit bus are ripped and turned into a sub bus The high order bits 63 62 61 and 60 are specified as a range with wire 63 the most significant Wire 34 is ripped next followed by wire 45 The last four wires are specified as a range with wire O the most significant of the four If the ripper pin with this RULE property value is connected to the bus DATA 0 9 then wire 63 on the source bus is connected to DATA O and wire 3 on the source bus is connected to DATA 9 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 19 Additional Editing Features Setting up the Ripper Design Architect MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Report Check View Help 4 20 Select Filter c F Set Grid Snap Off Hide Grid Set Basepoint Set Autoroute Off Ripper _ NS Setup Ripper Set Ripper Mode Implicit S7 Auto None wo Angled Straight Set Implicit Ripper Set Ripper Query Set Ripper dots A On On Off Off Set Autoplaced Set Auto Ripper Symbol Text Height Component Name MGC_GENLIB rip 0 125 Symbol Name 1X1 OK Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Setting up the Ripper The illustration on
121. BA Object can be exported then imported to the Simulator BA Object Merging Final Changes onto the Source Schematic When the design is finished the changes in the Back Annotation objects can be merged onto the source schematic before archiving This is done by invoking the DESIGN SHEET editor in Design Architect on each viewpoint and merging the annotations selectively or all together onto the source schematic If you are working with reusable sheets this practice of merging annotations may not be desirable Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 9 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Design Viewpoints Iconic View e Default location for design viewpoints and back annotation objects 6 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Design Viewpoints Iconic View Even though you can think of a viewpoint as a wrapper around the source design the viewpoint object and the associated back annotation objects are saved to a position inside the root component container This is done so that when you copy the design from one location to another all you need to do is specify the root compound container and you get all the associated viewpoints and back annotation objects with it The figure on the facing page shows the default location for the design viewpoints and back annotation objects In this directory structure the directory with the path PROJECT
122. Blocks i 5 a Sa i y J e Validating Models Working with i Design Viewpoints Module 6 MOIRUVING MENHS e Creating Multiple y Component Interfaces Component Interfaces Repoiti porting on and Registration ENEY Component Interfaces y Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Lesson 7 3 Component Interfaces and Registration oo ee Component Structure Conceptual View raphical Model A Model Table Body Property List Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Simple Component Structure Conceptual View The basic unit structure of the EDDM is called a component In other systems this unit structure might be called a cell A component can be thought of as a sphere containing a collection of models that represent a chunk of electronics The simple structure illustrated on the facing page shows a component that models an S R latch The component cont
123. C Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help Tools E D TE Navigator m T Fa na Sl Ke Se eae Ny SR design_arch training my_dff al X JEER MONITOR 7 bold_browser a T I p m we F eE Ola NAVIGATE TOOLS bows ccusim a eau z z ARCHY PONEN me EAA in aE AIK CONFIG TRASH wei V Dph E Br Ere COPY MOVE FastScan FlexTest HE irn E E A al A se FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Open Obje Unselect A Goto Direc Popup Men Move Obj S Show Refe Open Moni Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Open Navil Select Obj Explore P opy Objet C Change Re Read File Close Win Report Inf Select All Navigator hange Ol A Check Refe 1 Invoking Design Architect Explore Down P Goto Active Window blue border Resize Window _ Show References 1 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Window Buttons and Controls The illustration on the left show how the Design Manager appears when it is invoked from a shell The title bar on the window has several important controls When you click the Maximize button the window expands to fill the whole screen Click Maximize again and the window returns to its original size When you click on the Minimize button the window turns into an icon When you double click on the Close Window button on the far left the window goes away Finally if you place the mouse pointer on the title bar and press the left mouse button y
124. Design Architect Training Workbook Software Version 8 5 Copyright 1991 1995 Mentor Graphics Corporation All rights reserved Confidential May be photocopied by licensed customers of Mentor Graphics for internal business purposes only The software programs described in this document are confidential and proprietary products of Mentor Graphics Corporation Mentor Graphics or its licensors No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated or transferred disclosed or otherwise provided to third parties without the prior written consent of Mentor Graphics The document is for informational and instructional purposes Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice and the reader should in all cases consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been made The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in the written contracts between Mentor Graphics and its customers No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor Graphics whatsoever MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIAB
125. Design Architect in the Framework Environment Editing Files with Notepad Design Manager EB MGC File Edit Search View Options Help Navigator Zoom to Prey 3 H H extern key_lab VI f 3 Supdate_softke SESSION MONITOR function key_f4 if last_uppe wer VOID o SJ a TRAN Sview_area l lt Copy to Cursor SCRIPT MONITOR else Cut Smessage You u ea using the Paste Session NAVIGATE TOOLS HIER b Select ARCHY PONENT Unselete p B CONFIG TRASH The following editing actions can be done e Move duplicate and delete selected text e Copy selected text into a system clipboard e Insert text from a system clipboard e Undo or redo editing actions 1 38 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Editing Files with Notepad The Notepad editor enables you to accomplish several types of actions on text contained within a Notepad window You can do any of the following from the Notepad popup menu which is illustrated in the figure on the facing page Undo or redo editing actions If you want to reverse the effects of an action you can use the Undo popup menu item to return the file to the way it was before the last action If you decide you want that last action after
126. Features Setting Up the Page e Unlimited page size e Pin spacing specifies the distance between pins measured in user units e User units define the coordinate system e Instances take on the units of sheet e Default symbol pin grid 1 pin e Default sheet pin grid 0 25 inches Setup gt Net Comment Page gt Page SETU pa Pin Space 0 25 User Units inch S OK Cancel 4 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Setting Up the Page The logical size of a sheet in Design Architect is virtually boundless You can control the actual physical size by specifying the distance between points on the pin grid The reason you specify pin spacing in user units is to control the scale of printouts or to meet a Company standard There is always a one to one logical mapping between the pin grid of the Symbol Editor and the pin grid of the Schematic Editor regardless of the spacing specified for the grid in the different editors For example if two pins on the symbol are 5 grid spaces apart in the Symbol Editor there corresponding instance pins will be 5 grid spaces apart on the pin grid in the Schematic Editor To change the physical units specified for the pin grid you choosing the Setup gt Other Options gt Page menu item in the Symbol Editor and the Setup gt Net Comment Page gt Page menu item in the Schematic Editor Pin spacing is a real number that specifies the dist
127. LE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the subdivision c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 A complete list of trademark names appears in a separate Trademark Information document Mentor Graphics Corporation 8005 S W Boeckman Road Wilsonville Oregon 97070 7777 This is an unpublished work of Mentor Graphics Corporation Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS About This Training Workbook___ SSSSSSSSSC Xiii Introduction XT Installing the Training Data Print Out the Lab Exercises____ XT Course Overview XV Training Workbook Goals xvi Timeline for Course Completion Module 1 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Module 1 Overview Lesson 1 The Electronic Design Data Model Design Architect and the EDDM Component Structure Conceptual View Component Structure Iconic View Component Within a Component Design Viewpoint Conceptual View Lesson 2 Common Elements of the User Interface Window Buttons and Navigator Controls Menus and Mouse Buttons Palettes Softkeys Com
128. MGC required Errors 1 Warnings E lt H I gt Tell the System that the Dangling Pin in OK Remember that the goal is to produce a sheet that checks without errors or warnings Now tell the system that the dangling pin on the my_dff instance is there on purpose 1 Highlight the pin handle name in the Check Status window and look for the selected pin on the schematic sheet Close the Check Status window Zoom into the area around the selected pin Unselect the pin then select the Net Vertex on the Pin Add a CLASS property to the vertex with a value of dangle Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 55 Additional Editing Features Check the Sheet Again 1 Recheck the sheet The dangle warning should go away as shown in the following figure TA Check Sheet add_convert schematic sheet1 Check SymbolPins 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Overlap 0O errors 0 warnings Check NotDots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Closedots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Dangl 0O errors 0 warnings Check INIT Properties 0O errors 0 warnings Check Owner 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Instanc 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Net 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Fram O errors 0 warnings MGC required add_conve
129. P properties you just added were added to the back annotation object Open the add_convert Schematic 1 Draw the Unselect All stroke in the Schematic View window then select the ADD_CONVERT instance Zoom in if you need to 2 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Open gt Down Why won t the system open down on the add_convert sheet Add REF Properties to the Functional Blocks Add a REF property value pair to each functional block on the root sheet Use the following list as a guide U1 ANALOG U2 FREQ_DET U3 ADD_CONVERT U4 ACCESS_CHECK 6 98 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Notice that a REF property is recorded in the Back Annotation window each time you add one to an instance Latch the PCB Viewpoint 1 2 3 4 From the pulldown menu choose EDIT gt Latch Version gt Latch Version Verify that the ALL button is selected then click OK Unlatch the pcb_design_vpt back annotation object by selecting EDIT gt Latch Version gt Unlatch Version from the pulldown menu Click the BA button then click OK Save and Close the PCB Viewpoint 1 2 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Save Design Viewpoint Click the CLOSE VPT icon on the SETUP palette Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 99 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exercise 3 Cross connecting a Back Annotation Object In this
130. Pulldown Menu Userware gt Transcript p Popup Menu l Setup 7 Session Design Management A Open Sheet Location Map gt Set Working Directory Open Symbol Export Screen Show Location Map Open VHDL Change Entry Set Viewpoint Read Map Open Source Code Find Component MGC QuickHDL Select Stroke Drag A p a Menu Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Menus Mouse Buttons Pulldown Menus Place the mouse pointer on the Menu Bar item and press the Left or Right mouse button Popup Menus Place the mouse pointer in the window area and press the Right mouse button Graphic Elements in Menus Menu items Represent a specific task or a category of tasks The examples shown on the facing page are Notepad Cleanup Windows Userware Transcript Setup Design Management Location Map and Print Screen menu items from the MGC pulldown menu e Cascade arrow Indicates that a cascading menu is present e Separator Divides a related group of menu items from the rest of the menu items Cascading menu Displays to the right of the parent menu item Prompt bar indicator A colon indicating that the menu item displays a prompt bar for additional command or function information e Dialog box indicator An ellipsis indicating that the menu item displays a dialog box for additional information to the system A cascading menu represents a gro
131. References to moved deleted object outside or at the same level as the component are not updated external gt External L Reference ea C a ai first_design y original original original first_design B a first_design C a Original Original A Reference B Reference C 8 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Moving and Deleting Design Objects You can use either the Design Manager to move or delete a design object You can also use Integrated Design Management IDM functions which enable you to manage design data that you create in Mentor Graphics applications by providing easy access to copy move delete and change references In essence a moved design object is one that is copied and then deleted When you move an object within a component or design all objects in the containment hierarchy of the selected object are also moved When you move design objects that refer to other design objects in the selected set the Design Manager automatically updates those references to reflect the new location Unresolved references or references to external objects remain unchanged Any design objects that reference the moved object within the containment of a component are also automatically updated to reflect the new location However
132. Sheet 1 2 3 2 64 Move the scroll bar to the top of the gen_lib palette then click buf Place the buf instance on the sheet as shown in the diagram Unselect the instance with a U stroke Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic PRE 0 0 CLR EN D 10 0 SET 0 SET 10 CLK s EN 0 0 CLR CLR wa 0 A 0 portin my_dff Schematic Diagram Add the Remaining inv Instances to the Sheet Q 0 0 QB o lt 4 portiout Add the remaining inv portin and portout instances to the sheet as shown in the schematic diagram Zoom out witha stroke if you need to expand the view Double click the Middle mouse button at various points to pan around the schematic The point double clicked on always moves to center screen If you misplace an instance select it draw a shark fin stroke 4 then place the instance in the correct position and click the Left mouse button Unselect all instances with a 4 stroke when you are finished Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 65 Creating a Schematic Add the portin and portout Instances to the Sheet 1 5 Place the mouse cursor on the Active Symbol window press the right mouse button and choose Symbol History Click on portin and execute the form with a stroke The portin symbol now becomes the active symbol Place the portin ins
133. T willis allun es di a i ai gt J F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Open Obje Unselect A Goto Direc Popup Men Move Obje S Show Refe Open Moni Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Open Navil Select Obj Explore P opy Objeq C Change Rel Read File Close Win Report Inf Select All Navigator hange Ob A Check Refe 1 2 Transcript Window 1 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Transcript Window A transcript is a record of the events that occur during a session Although you can trigger events in a variety of ways such as clicking an icon or choosing a menu item the actions taken are taken by executing a series of AMPLE functions The transcript is a record of the AMPLE functions Other information such as a warning or error messages are also recorded in the transcript It is possible to select text from a Transcript then copy and paste the text to an ASCII file using the Notepad Editor The ASCII text can then be saved as a macro file for later execution This is a handy feature for creating application startup files and custom userware files Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 33 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 34 Session Setup al ee SETUP P SETUP SESSION X11_POINTER Dialog Box
134. The my_dff Schematic window should appear 4 Use the View All command to center the my_dff schematic then zoom out onetime lt Open a Second Schematic Window on schematic2 1 Activate the DA Session window again click the OPEN SHEET icon then the Options button 2 Click the New Sheet button 7 34 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Open Sheet Component Name my_dff Navigator Sheet sheet1 CaS Click here w Startup File Path Open Sheet Options Component training da_n card_reader add_convert my_dff Available schematic sheet Lh Version 0 Existing New Sheet Specify New Schematic Name Schematic schematic Sheet sheet1 Sheet Border No Yes Size D 2 Set OK Reset Cancel 1 Fill out the dialog box as shown above then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 35 Component Interfaces and Registration 2 Click OK on the Open Sheet dialog box A new blank Schematic window should come up Notice that schematic2 is specified in the DA Status line Copy the Original schematic into schematic2 1 Activate the schematic window that contains the original my_dff sheet and choose the following popup menu item Select gt All 2 Draw a C stroke for copy 3 Move the
135. Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Appendix A Customizing Exercises Common Scopes in DA and QuickSim Command Window Lab Exercises Creating a startup file for BOLD Browser Creating a startup file for da_session Add a Navigator Button to the Set Working Directory Form Customizing the Modify Property Stroke Add a Zoom to Previous Function Key Fix this Broken Design Database Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 2 A 4 A 7 A 14 A 15 A 17 A 20 A 22 Customizing Exercises Common Scopes in DA and QuickSim symbol schematic simv_list hdtxt_area da_window window_scope_name Returns the scope name of the active window ask_scope_frame_name lt Returns a hierarchy of scope names for the active window ask_scope_function_name lt Returns the function names that are defined in the active window HOME mgc userware startup da_session startup simv des_arch base da_window startup simv_listample da_session ample session_area ample schematic startup simv_tk ample da_window ample symbol startup schematic ample Site simview startup symbol ample quicksim startup A 2 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Common Scopes in DA and QuickSim The block structure to the left provides a simplified view of common scopes in Design Architect and QuickSim You may
136. YES Repeat the above process until no more broken references are reported Examine the repaired reference with the Navigator If the referencing object is a part object and it points to a symbol object make sure that the new reference points to a symbol object that is in the same directory as the part object Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Exercise 3 Creating and Copying a Configuration Before starting this exercise make sure you have closed all the schematic and symbol windows within Design Architect In order to create a configuration object within the Design Manager that includes card_reader add_convert and my_dff they must not be opened within another application In this exercise you will create a configuration object and then you will use that configuration object to copy your card_reader component to another directory Check the References to Make Sure They are Interoperable Use the steps described in the first lab exercise in this module to check the references of the card_reader add_convert and my_dff components and all the components found in the component_lib directory Use the Explore Contents button to display the references within the part and other models within the component Make sure that all the references begin with either MGC_GENLIB or your_path training da_n Open a Configuration Window Make sure that the Design Manager Session window is active the
137. Zoom to Previous add new key definition to restore previous view extern key_label_f4s Zoom to Previous Supdate_softkey_labels function key_f4s INDIRECT if last_upper VOID amp amp last_lower VOID make sure initial view area stroke is done view_area last_upper last_lower else message You must first view an area using the 159 stroke Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 21 Customizing Exercises Exercise 6 Fix this Broken Design Database Situation After you complete this training course you go back to your desk and a co worker tells you that he did the training exercises on his own This person shows you the following design data and asks you to fix it What is wrong with this picture You will find a copy of this design in your HOME training da_n com directory p training ig i B p my_dff part add_convert schematic he rT gt m my_dff part schem_id sheet1 l 5 fo Cir add_convert part my_dff part schematic Objective Repair the design data above Make it look like the design data you just created in this course Before you start examine the broken data with your instructor and discuss several strategies on how to fix it A 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5
138. _A my_design schematic sheetl and sheet contains a reference back it its parent schematic The references for sheet1 are keep in an associated file called a attr file Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 6 Copying Design Objects e In Design Manager o Copy by containment or by reference e Resolved references are updated e Unresolved references remain unchanged external External Reference Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Copying Design Objects You can use the Design Manager to copy your design or component The Design Manager copies objects in two modes by reference or by containment The simple copy uses containment to determine which objects are copied All objects contained in the component container are copied All resolved references are automatically updated Any references that were unresolved before the copy operation remain unchanged You can modify these unresolved references to point to existing objects using the Design Manager The Design Manager allows all objects within a design object to be copied The figure on the facing page shows schematic reference updating during a simple copy operation A set of s
139. _reader add_convert Replace Existing Sheet No Replace Sheet Name sheet Replace Schematic Name schematic_test Delete Registration From Interfaces Add Registration To Interfaces add_convert_test Remove Labels Add Labels test OK Ni Reset Cancel 5 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK 6 Close the original add_convert Schematic window without saving Create an add_convert_test Symbol and Register to a New Interface 1 Open a Symbol window on the original add_convert symbol 2 Adda TEST and PARITY pin to the symbol as shown in the following diagram START ULSE TCH q _CLR ACCESS 15 0 Add Pin TEST PARITY lt t Add Pin ADDRESS _IN READ ADD_CONVERT Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 41 Component Interfaces and Registration 3 Check the symbol 4 Choose the pulldown menu item File gt Save Symbol As training da_n card_reader add_convert Yes OK Reset Cancel 5 View the structure of the new add_convert component by choosing the pulldown menu item Report gt Interfaces gt This Design Notice that there is now two component interface tables with the add_convert_test interface defined as the Default Interface 6 Close the add_convert Symbol window without saving Replace the add_convert instance on the card_reader Schematic 1 Open a Schematic window on the card_reade
140. a primitive my_dff schm schematic latch primitive m inv primitive buf primitive i portin primitive portout primitive H gt lt Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 59 Additional Editing Features The Component Hierarchy window appears and shows you the structure of the add_convert schematic you just created Click on the my_dff component to see the structure underneath End of Lab Exercises This concludes the lab exercises for this module If you have time turn to Exercise 5 in Appendix A Customizing Exercises and learn how to create a function that allows you to return to a previous zoom setting 4 60 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Lesson 1 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks ____ _ dS 3 Lesson 2 Updating Instances on a Schematic SS T Lab Exercises 525 Creating the card_reader Functional Blocks _ 5 26 Updating an Instance 534 Generating a card_reader Symbol ____SSSSSSS SSSSSSSSSSSSSS _ 5 35 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 1 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Module 5 Overview Design Architect 5 in the Framework Environment Module 1
141. a_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 schematic2 Y schematic D CLK PRE CLR Q QB qfall 0 qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 model schematic A lt D 7 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Registering More than One Schematic When you save a schematic from the Schematic Editor window the schematic is automatically registered with the default component interface The results of saving a second schematic are shown on the facing page Notice that only one schematic can have label default This schematic is selected whenever you open a schematic and don t specify which schematic you want When you save a schematic you may tell the system at that time if you want that schematic to have the default label Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 15 Component Interfaces and Registration Adding Labels to Models STRAINING da_n my_di my_dff STRAINING da_n card_reader my dif my_dff Default Graphical Models my_dff i TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff m schematic Functional Models schem id TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic S Sheet1 schematic schematic i schematic2 default schem_id 4 TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 L L gheet1 scnematic schemati
142. able to have a component with more than one symbol with differing symbol body properties and possibly differing pin counts The rip component in the Mentor Graphics genlib is an example There are a number of ripper symbols within one component each with a different pin count The ability to create more than one component interface table within one component allows you to create a component with multiple symbols with differing pins counts and symbol body properties Even though you may register more than one symbol to a single component interface the common practice is to create a different component interface table for each symbol registered This allows for greater flexibility The example on the facing page shows a component with a my_dff component interface and an ANSI component interface Only one component interface is marked Default so if you instantiate the component and don t specify which component interface you want to use the interface marked Default is used Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 27 Component Interfaces and Registration Reporting on Interfaces Report gt Interfaces This Design o Interfaces relating to component of sheet Selected Schematic Editor only o Select one instance on sheet o Interfaces relating to component Other o Interfaces of another design Reporting Interface my_dff Pin Count 6 Registered Models Type mgc_schematic mgc_symbol mgc_schemati
143. ad bottom to top The system defined default is 0 Height A positive non zero number that specifies the height in user units The system defined default is 0 1875 inches e Font A registered font family that is valid for the workstation you are using The system default font type is stroke Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 31 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Symbol Property Text Switches e Visibility Switch Determines whether a property value is visible on an instance o Hidden o Visible e Stability Switch Determines if a property value is changeable on an instance Switch Type Change Values on Instance Delete on Instance Fixed No No Protected Variable At instantiation time only No Nonremovable 3 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Symbol Property Text Switches Two property switches control whether a graphic symbol property value is visible on the symbol instance and changeable on the symbol instance The property visibility switch controls whether the value of the property is visible Visible or invisible Hidden on the instance The property stability switch controls whether the value of the property can be changed on an instance It can have one of the following values e Fixed Values cannot be altered or deleted on an instance at instantiation time o Protected Values can be
144. ager in one of two ways Double Click on the design_arch icon in the Tools Window or e Select a component icon in the Navigator window press the right mouse button and choose Open gt design_arch Design Architect can also be invoked directly from a shell by typing MGC_HOME bin da After Design Architect comes up it is a good practice to Maximize the window then verify the setting of the working directory Normally the working directory will be set to the pathname specified by the shell environmental variable MGC_WD if this variable is defined otherwise the working directory is set to the same location as the shell from which DA is invoked It is always best to verify that the working directory is set to the location where you want it because all relative pathnames that you enter will be considered relative to the setting of the current working directory The tools within the Design Architect environment are represented by icons in the palette on the right You click on the OPEN SHEET icon to bring up the Schematic Editor window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 5 Creating a Schematic Opening a Schematic Sheet e Click the OPEN SHEET icon e Enter the new component pathname e Use the Navigator button for existing component k ss o OPEN SHEET HOMEAtraining da_n card_reader my_dff Use the Navigator to find existing components Default Sheet Name 2 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V
145. ains a graphical model called a symbol and a functional model in the form of a schematic The control center of the component is called the component interface and may be thought of as the nucleus of the cell Graphical Model symbol Composed of symbol body graphics symbol pins and properties A component may have more than one symbol model associated with it Functional Model schematic Describes the functional behavior of the electronics being modeled More than one functional model may be present A non schematic functional model is called a primitive Each functional model must have input and output ports that match the input and output pins on the symbol Component Interface Acts as the control center for the component structure This design object takes the form of a table that collects and retains information about the symbol pins symbol body properties and each functional and timing model associated with the component Placing a model in the model table of the Component Interface registers the model with the component Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Component Structure Iconic View ep s r_latch 0D D S part s r_latch schematic u py k 4 Contains the Component Interface C A b ES table schem_id _ sheetl e Component Icon represents the directories and files in a component str
146. al 3 Page 3 83 AMP Reference Manual 3 Page 3 316 Customizing the Common User Interface 2 Page 2 1 Customizing the Common User Interface Front Back Matter Page Customizing the Common User Interface Front Back Matter Page Customizing the Common User Interface Front Back Matter Page Customizing the Common User Interface Front Back Matter Page Customizing the Common User Interface Front Back Matter Page OK Reset Cancel Help SSS The Follow Travel Log dialog box appears as shown above 2 Select the Customizing the Common User Interface 2 Page 2 1 3 Click OK or execute a gt stroke The BOLD Browser replaces the AMPLE Reference Manual with the document Customizing the Common User Interface 4 Close the document window when you are finished experimenting with the travel log Executing a Full Text Search You can search for specific words or groups of words using the Search facility in BOLD Browser You should have no windows open within the BOLD Browser except for the Session window If you do close them before proceeding 1 Choose Menu Bar Search gt Text Search choose options Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 83 Design Architect in the Framework Environment The BOLD Browser displays the Text Search dialog box as shown below Text Search Search for softkey Allow compound or proximity search No Yes Match upper
147. al structure of the component and the Component Interface table This window does many of the tasks that were previously accomplished by using a shell level utility called the Component Interface Browser CIB The Component Window can have up to four subwindows The Component Information subwindow shows the component structure Double clicking on the component icon reveals the component structure underneath and the name of the Component Interface table italic font In the illustration to the left my_dff is the name of the Component Interface and it is marked as the default interface table Later you will learn that a component can have more than one table When you select the Component Interface name as shown on the left and press the right mouse button you can choose menu items that display information about the Model List the Pin List and the Body Properties List In the illustration the component my_dff only has a schematic model Because there is no symbol the Pin List is empty and the Body Property List is empty When you double click on the schematic icon in the Model List the labels for the schematic are listed underneath Later you will learn that you can reference the schematic by specifying one of these labels as the value of the MODEL property on the symbol You will also be shown how to add your own custom labels Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 57 Creating a Schematic Lab Overview
148. all you can use the Redo popup menu item Move duplicate and remove selected text You can use the Move or Copy to Cursor popup menu items to move text to a different location or to copy it to the cursor location You can delete selected text into either a System paste buffer or into a Notepad Session paste buffer using the Cut popup menu items the System buffer is the default Copy selected text into a clipboard If you have text that you want to transfer to another location you can copy it into either the Session clipboard the System clipboard or the X window cut buffer using the Copy to Clipboard popup menu item A clipboard essentially acts as a paste buffer within the Notepad session or between applications you have active on your workstation the System clipboard is the default Insert text from a clipboard If you have text copied to a Session clipboard or a System clipboard you can copy the text into the file you are editing using the Paste popup menu item the System clipboard is the default Select and unselect text You can use the Select popup menu item to select text on which you want to do other editing actions You can also select text by pressing the Select mouse key dragging the cursor to the end of the required text and releasing the Select mouse button If text is highlighted you can remove the highlighting using the Unselect popup menu item Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 39 Design Architect in the F
149. alog box is displayed Select BLOCK_NAME from the Existing Property Name scrolling window Property Value FREQ_DET 8 Click OK position the FREQ DET text inside the rectangle and click the Select mouse button then Unselect All 4 9 Use the previous steps to add the BLOCK_NAME property to ANALOG and ADD_CONVERT in their respective rectangles then Unselect All 4 Add a MODEL Property to Each Rectangle Using what you have learned from earlier lab exercises and the previous step add a MODEL property to each rectangle Specify a value of schematic for the ADD_CONVERT block and leave the MODEL property values undefined on the other blocks Create Functional Blocks In this step you will select each rectangle and its contents convert the elements into a symbol and instantiate that symbol in place 1 Reset the working directory to lt your_home_directory gt training da_n card_reader 2 Unselect everything on the sheet 4 3 Set the Select Filter to select only Comments and Symbol Pins 4 Select the comment graphics and symbol pins of the ACCESS_CHK rectangle by pressing the select mouse button and drag the mouse cursor across an area that encloses the ACCESS_CHK rectangle Make sure that nothing else outside of the rectangle is selected 5 Choose the following pulldown menu item Edit gt Make Symbol Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 31 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks The followi
150. an be attached to the symbol body a symbol pin or a comment object It is also possible to add properties that have no graphic owner This type of property is called a logical symbol property These are properties not attached to the symbol body graphics but rather owned by the logical symbol Using the ADD PROPERTY icon in the palette or the Shift F5 function key only lets you add properties one at a time The Properties gt Add gt menu items provide methods of adding multiple property name value pairs to objects The following table shows the differences Menu Path Property Attributes Selection like type Set Add Multiple Properties must be the same Repeat Adding Single Properties gt can be different Use Current Selection Repeat Adding Single Properties gt can be different different Use Changing Selection Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 47 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Adding Logical Symbol Properties 1 Unselect All 2 popup Properties Logical gt Add Single Property Add Property Highlighted property name will Existing Property Name be used unless new property name is filled in below New Property Name AUTHOR Graphic Property Value JennyG Graphic o Nongraphic Property Type a String eee Variable Visibility Switch xz Number v Fixed x Visible v Expression Protected
151. ance between pins and is measured in user units with a value of inch centimeter cm millimeter mm or pin Pin is non measurable and is most commonly used in the Symbol Editor The default pin spacing in the Symbol Editor is 1 pin for the Schematic Editor it is 0 25 inches After the Setup gt gt Page pulldown menu item has been executed the Setup Page prompt bar is displayed in the active window as shown on the left You can change the value for the user units by clicking the choice stepper button to the right of the User Units field Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 5 Additional Editing Features Setting Up the Grids e Pin grid constrains electrical objects e Snap grid constrains non electrical objects e Setup gt Grid Report Color gt Grid Set Grid Grids Per Pin 4 Minor Multiple k aN Major Multiple Show Snap On On Off Off OK Reset Cancel e Grid looks like this e e o o ee ee o o o o o o o o oo o o o ew Minor multiple _ e e o o ooo o ooo ooo Moving pointer pef ia oneen X OTET ee EEEE Pointer gt es Major multiple Heee e eee e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o ooo oo oo o e e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o oo o ool 4 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Setting Up the Grids Two grid patterns help
152. and Adding Properties Elements of a Symbol MODEL Property Pin Value l PinType a Ps a IN schematic Symbol Body i Symbol Body Origin Point Properties Pin Property Value X 3 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Elements of a Symbol A component symbol is composed of four basic parts Shape or symbol body The graphical image of the symbol The graphics that display the shape are called symbol graphics The symbol shape usually conforms to an industry standard Pins Points where the symbol electronically connects when an instance is placed on a schematic sheet Pin names must match the external nets on the schematic These external nets are identified by the portin and portout instances Origin Point The reference point used to place the symbol on the schematic sheet Properties Provide information that can t be represented graphically Optionally the symbol may contain the following Whiskers A symbol body can also have short lines called whiskers that project from the border of the symbol body to indicate where input and output pins are connected These whiskers are a convention used in the Mentor Graphics component libraries but they are not required When you select the symbol instance on a sheet the whiskers are also selected as they are considered part of the symbol body Symbol Text Provides information about the symbol When
153. anguages but does not follow the standard AMPLE syntax All frames must have the FREXP property assigned to them with a valid property value The value assigned must adhere to a specific syntax which uses such key words as FOR IF CASE and OTHERWISE FOR frames are used when you want to repeat the same circuit over and over not only in the same design but in different designs requiring a different number of copies of the frame IF frames let you conditionally include circuitry in your schematic The evaluation of an IF frame expression results in TRUE or FALSE conditions CASE frames allow you to define cases when a portion of a circuit is included in a schematic If the CASE frame expression evaluates to TRUE the circuitry is added If it evaluates to FALSE the circuit is not included and if an OTHERWISE frame exists the OTHERWISE circuit is included You may add a frame to you schematic by choosing the ADD gt Frame popup menu item Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 29 Additional Editing Features Frame Example delay n Component delay n Schematic Frame delay Symbol 4 30 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Frame Example The illustration on the left shows how a FOR frame can be used to create an instance for a bus of varying width The MGC_GENLIB components delay and delay n are used in this example Starting at the bottom of the illustration t
154. anipulate a configuration by selecting the unique icon which represents it Configuration objects are versioned As a result the configuration can evolve with the design it describes The process of creating and manipulating design configurations is called design data configuration management Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 15 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Design Data Configuration Management e Lets you distribute a design across several locations e Consists of o Configuration window o Configuration object e Steps to create a configuration a Open a configuration window Gather design objects into window Specify a set of build rules Build the configuration Save the configuration o a 0 Tr 8 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Data Design Configuration Management Design object references allow you to distribute your design across many locations in the file system For example your design may be a schematic that references components in common libraries on another workstation In addition you may have used the Design Manager to create a reference from your schematic to the documentation that describes it and that documentation may reside in a different directory than the schematic Using references to distribute designs is a powerful feature but makes operating on the entire design as a single unit difficult For example you might wa
155. any number of downstream tools can create a viewpoint on a single design Because the viewpoints capture changes in Back Annotation Objects and the source design is protected from change people using the downstream tools can work in parallel and experiment with different design modifications and scenarios Notice that this design has two QuickSim viewpoints Each viewpoint can be configured differently with different models and different timing value combinations And because a viewpoint is a container input stimulus and the simulation results from each configuration can be keep inside their respective viewpoints Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 13 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation How Viewpoints are Created Auto Tool Batch script TimeBase Interactive Mode Mode Mode Mode Capture Capture Capture Capture Design Design Design Design 6 14 Invoke QuickPath Run Viewpoint 4 Invoke Invoke E Timebase DVE Set up Invoke QuickPath Invoke QuickPath Configuration Save Viewpoint Invoke QuickPath Auto tool mode QuickSim Il creates a default viewpoint if none exists or uses existing one Batch mode Shell script DVE creates viewpoint tailored to company or design process TimeBase mode Timebase calculates timing and saves timing cache to default viewpoint Interactive mode You invoke DVE and create or modify a vi
156. artup file that is executed when Design Architect is invoked Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 39 Creating a Schematic Using the Select Popup Menus e Good for one selection operation then returns to select filter 2 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Using the Select Popup Menus Objects can be selected in a variety of ways using the popup menus Select gt All Select gt Area and Select gt Exterior cascading menus are found under all popup menus If you choose anything other than Filtered or Anything the selection of that object overrides the selection filter for that one time only For example assume that the selection filter prevents property text from being selected and that nothing is currently selected in the window If you choose the ADD gt Select gt All gt Filtered menu item none of the property text is selected If you choose the ADD gt Select gt All gt Anything menu item all of the property text is selected in addition to everything else that is in the window This may not be what you want However if you choose ADD gt Select gt All gt Property all of the property text is selected in the window and all other objects remain unselected The Select gt Exterior menu selects objects outside a specified rectangular region Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 41 Creating a Schematic Manipulating Objects schematic palette
157. ave the configuration so that you can recreate the configuration at a later time Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 17 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 18 Configuration Operations Use configuration objects to o Copy designs o Release designs One version depth of configuration References are automatically updated Release is a protected copy of configuration To modify a released design o Fix original and release again o Fix copy and release Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Configuration Operations After you create a configuration you can operate on it with the commands that are available in the configuration window These commands operate on every design object version in the configuration in a single operation In a single operation you can copy each design object version in the configuration to a single target directory When you copy the design object you are only copying a single version of the design object If the original design object is at version number 8 the copied design object version number becomes 1 Containment relationships are preserved References are automatically updated to reflect the new location Important record keeping information is stored in the copied configuration object A release is a protected copy of the configuration Containment relationships are preserved references are automatically updated the versions a
158. ave them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 63 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Exercise 1 Copying the Training Data In this training course you will be creating a hierarchical design from training data supplied from a read only master location Since you will be modifying the data you must first copy the data to a place in your local directory structure 1 Log in to your workstation Log in by entering your user name password and home directory pathname assigned by your Instructor User Name Password Home Directory pathname 2 Bring up a shell set the directory to your home directory and enter the following command SMGC_HOME bin dmgr 1 64 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment After a few minutes a Design Manager window should come up and appear similar to the following illustration Design Manager ee MGC Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help Tools lalf fusers traint _ Navigator T M ER SETUP SETUP SESSION MONITOR Er X JRE MONITOR X z TH NAVIGATE TOOLS ARCHY PONENT Sar E CONFIG TRASH f a
159. be generated for each wire on the input and output buses Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 31 Additional Editing Features 4 32 Repeating Instances INST property value 3 A 4 5 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Repeating Instances A repeating instance is a short hand way to specify a FOR Frame It allows a single instance to be repeated by naming the instance with a one dimensional range using the INST property e g INST XINST 3 0 Appending an optional range to the INST property value defines the number of times the instance will be repeated in the evaluated model and how the nets will be connected to each repeated instance Connections are implied by the ratio of the dimensions of a connected wire or bus to the dimensions of the pin of the repeated instance A FOR Frame with the expression for I28_REPEAT 0 to 3 will be created by Design Architect when this schematic is evaluated within the context of a Design Viewpoint Four instances named XINST 0 XINST 1 XINST 2 and XINST 3 will be generated Each instance will have the same set of pins A 3 0 B 3 0 CLK X and D 1 0 but some pins will be attached to different nets as follows 1 The pin XINST 0 A 3 0 will be attached to the net DATA 3 0 the pin XINST 1 A 3 0 will be attached to the net DATA 7 4 the pin XINST 2 A 3 0 will be attached to the net DATA 11 8 and th
160. bed above Assume that the viewpoint opened in the figure on the left is a viewpoint for a sub module of a more complex design When it comes time to create a viewpoint for the entire design a new viewpoint by a different name can be opened in a different DVE session The design configuration rules for this sub module can then be exported to an ASCII file The content of the file takes the form of an AMPLE script And as previously described any back annotation information from the lower level viewpoint can be exported to a back annotation object in the higher level viewpoint In the viewpoint DVE session for the whole design the design configuration information from a pre tested sub module can be imported and added to the existing configuration rules by executing the newly created ASCII file as a dofile in acommand line For example if the exported configuration for a sub module is placed in a file named user jdesigner card_reader_config then from a command line in the DVE session for the whole design you type session dofile user jdesigner card_reader_config The information in the ASCII file is then imported to the new higher level viewpoint and added to the existing design configuration rules Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 59 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 6 60 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Lesson 3 Using Design Architect
161. bjects retain previous versions of your design Unversioned design objects retain only one version at a time Directories are not versioned Containers can be unversioned or versioned design objects However a versioned container does not version its directories only its attribute file metadata and other fileset members are versioned Mentor Graphics applications normally maintain two versions of a design object Realize that for large designs retaining two versions can consume large amounts of disk storage Some of the operations that you can perform on versioned data include displaying the number of versions setting the version depth copying a version deleting a version freezing or unfreezing a specific version reverting to a previous version and releasing multiple versions of a design object Changing the version depth does not immediately remove excess versions It only prunes versions when the next version manager operation occurs The next Design Manager or application save that occurs will update the versions using the version manager Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 21 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Releasing Designs First pass of Second pass of in process design in process design Version 3 Design Version 3 Version 3 Version 2 Version 2 Version 2 Change Version 2 Vers
162. ble Property Instance model modelfile modelcode ADD Visible Property Pin rise fall drive pintype ADD Visible Property Net init dtime decay It is important to note that only the properties you specify with the visible property rule are accessible to DFI and netlisters that use DFI calls and are only available as long as the design viewpoint exists You use the Add gt Visible Property popup menu item in the Design Configuration window as shown on the left If you want to edit an existing visible property rule select the visible property rule you want to change then execute the Design Configuration window popup menu item Edit A visible property rule can be removed from the list by using the Delete popup menu Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 37 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Specifying Substitute Property Values e Allows one property s value to be substituted for another e Provides a property value where none exists e Use popup menu Design Configuration Add Substitute e Fill out Form Add Substitute Substitute value of property rise With value of property fall OK Reset Cancel 6 38 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Specifying Substitute Property Values The substitution rule allows one property s value to be substituted for another property s value It can als
163. bol text my_dff and tap the F1 function key The symbol text should be selected and added to the selection group Press the Right mouse button and choose the Change Height gt 0 5 x Pin Spacing The text is reduced in size to 1 2 the pin grid spacing Draw a U stroke 4 to unselect all Click on the PRE property text and draw a4 stroke The text is rotated 90 degrees Draw a shark fin stroke then move the PRE text to the position shown in the symbol illustration on the previous page Draw a U stroke 4 to unselect all Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 67 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 11 Repeat the above procedure to rotate and move the CLR text 12 Individually select and move the remaining pin and pintype property text to the positions shown in the symbol diagram Check the Symbol 1 Using the default checking levels check your symbols for errors and warnings Choose the following pulldown menu item Design Architect Report Check View Help With Defaults y As Specified Set Defaults Report Check The Check Status window should look like this Check Symbol my_dff my_dff A Check Body 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Interfaces 0O errors 6 warnings Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface QB Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the
164. book V8 5 6 47 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Referencing Objects in a Hierarchy e A hierarchical design is similar to a hierarchical file structure e The origin of the design tree the top sheet called the root of the design the tree is upside down e Instances are like directories nets and instance pins are like files e Example I 1 I 3 OUT _ Design Root l Parent Instance ee vo Parent Instance ES SS Pin named OUT 6 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Referencing Objects in a Hierarchy Every instance net and instance pin within a design is part of a hierarchical tree of information that describes the relationship of every object to its surroundings This hierarchical arrangement is called the design tree with its origin beginning at the root of the design the top sheet When you are in an application that uses a design viewpoint you have access to the design tree thus providing you with a method to identify objects within the design hierarchy You can identify every instance net and instance pin by a pathname These pathnames are defined in relation to a hierarchy of instances that comprise the design A hierarchical design is conceptually similar to the hierarchical file structure of your workstation s operating system you can think of instances as the directories and
165. border a title block references above the title block and the circuit name under the circuit In the Schematic Editor a sheet border and title block can be automatically generated at sheet creation time or can be added after the sheet has been created through the Edit gt Add Sheet Border menu item All other comment objects can be generated with the menu items found in the Draw gt Add menu or the schematic_draw palette You can convert electrical objects to comment objects by choosing Edit gt Convert to Comment This converts nets and instances to comment objects Visible property text becomes properties on comment objects You cannot reconvert the converted comment objects back to electrical objects once they have been converted unless you undo all functions up to and including the Convert to Comment command When creating comment graphics and text in the Symbol Editor you 1 choose the menu items from the ADD popup menu as if you are adding symbol objects to the symbol window 2 select the symbol graphics and text that you want to convert and 3 choose Edit gt Convert to Comment This changes your symbol text and graphics to comment text and graphics Comment text is different than symbol text Symbol text is displayed as part of the symbol when the symbol is instantiated on the sheet comment text and graphics are not displayed when the symbol is instantiated You can reconvert converted comment objects back
166. both dialog boxes 6 Notice that the Title Block Information is filled in for you 7 Click OK Create the Rectangles for the Functional Blocks 1 Zoom into the center of the sheet until you see the pin grid 2 Click on the DRAW palette button 3 Click on the ADD RECTANGLE icon and create a rectangle that is 8 pin grid spaces wide and 6 pin grid spaces tall Fit the rectangle exactly on the grid points This is the ACCESS_CHK functional block Use the STRETCH icon to resize the rectangle if you need to 5 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 7 Copy the rectangle with a m stroke and position the copy so it is 6 grid spaces to the left and 1 grid space above the ACCESS_CHK rectangle This is the FREQ_DET functional block See the diagram Copy the rectangle again and position the copy so it is 6 grid spaces to the left of and 1 grid space below the FREQ_DET rectangle This is the ANALOG functional block See the diagram Copy the rectangle one more time and position the copy so it is 6 grid spaces to the right of and 1 grid space below the ANALOG rectangle This is the ADD_CONVERT functional block See the diagram Unselect All 4 View All gt then View Area around the blocks Add Symbol Pins to the Rectangles i Using the schematic diagram in page 5 26 as a guide you are going to click on the ADD PIN S icon four times once for each side of the d
167. by clicking Choose Shape Verify that the box shape is selected 9 Edit the shape to make the width greater than the height by entering 6 2 This will expand the width to accommodate the longer pin names Execute the shape form Execute the Generate Symbol form The new symbol window should popup with the new card_reader symbol contained therein Add CARD_READER symbol text to the symbol body Check and save the symbol Close the Symbol Editor window Check Save and Close the card_reader Schematic This action will re validate the schematic against the new card_reader symbol pins End of Lab Exercises This concludes the lab exercises for this module If you have time turn to Exercise 6 in Appendix A Customizing Exercises and learn how to repair a broken design database 5 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 6 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Lesson 1 Design Viewpoint Concepts _SSSSSSS SSSCSS S A3 Lesson 2 Using the Design Viewpoint Editor _ 6 17 Lesson 3 Using Design Architect to Edit and Merge Back Annotations 6 61 Lab Exercises G83 Creating a Simulation Viewpoint 6 84 Creating a PCB Viewpoint 695 Cross connecting a Back Annotation Object ____ C 4 1 Merging Annotations to the Source Sheet____ SCS 6 103 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 1 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Module 6 O
168. c Default Interface Pin Count 6 Registered Models Type mgc_symbol mgc_schematic Interfaces Path STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic Labels schematic Sschematic default STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff Labels default_sym STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 Labels schematic2 Sschematic ANSI Path STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff ANSI Labels default_sym STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic Labels schematic S schematic default AI 7 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Reporting on Interfaces It is not always necessary to bring up a Component window in order to get information on a component interface Quick summary reports can be generated from the Design Architect Schematic and Symbol Editor windows Select the Report gt Interfaces pulldown menu in Design Architect The following information is displayed in a popup message window interface name number of pins and associated model entries From the Schematic Editor if you choose Report gt Interfaces gt This Design information on the interfaces of the component associated with the active sheet is reported If you choose Report gt Interfaces gt Selected information on all interfaces relating to the single selected instance is displayed this is not available in the Symbol Editor If you choose Report gt Interfaces
169. c Hide Models List Selected Show Labels Model Select i a A my_dff STRAININ Edit ie Unregister Models D Search Validate Models Cie Report Ia PRE Boe Add Labels y CLR Q Delete Label QB D abels 7 i Add Labels To Selected Models pn Label hi_speed OK Reset Cancel ie A a See 7 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Adding Labels to Models You may add labels to models from the Component window by selecting the model and choosing the popup menu Add Labels In the illustration on the facing page the label hi_speed is being added to schematic 2 This means that you may change the value of the MODEL property to hi_speed and schematic2 will be selected for use Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 17 Component Interfaces and Registration Unregister Models A STRAINING da_n my_dt my_dff STRAINING da ncard readermy df my_dff Default Graphical Models i my_dff TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff part default_sym m schematic Functional Models L schem id TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic L sheet schematic T schematic schematic2 default schem_id TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 L A sheet1 scnematic schemat
170. cal layout can get started early even while significant modifications are still being made to the original source design The illustration on the left shows how the concept of the viewpoint makes this possible As shown on the left page the Simulator and the Layout tool both see the reflected image of the source design in their respective viewpoints Changes made to the design by these downstream tools are captured in their respective Back Annotation objects The person working with the simulator has changed the timing value on the center and gate to 10 ns in order to see the effect on circuit performance Also in order to ensure a minimum wire length between the two upper blocks the simulation person has pre assigned the reference designator U1 that tells the PCB PACKAGE tool to include these blocks in the same physical package The person using the Layout Tool has also made some changes from a layout perspective The bottom two blocks are assigned reference designators and a timing value 7 has been added to the wire on the left side possibly due to a long physical wire length Notice that this person does not see the change to the center timing value that was made by the person using the simulator see the bottom figures An important concept in keeping this design scenario stable is a concept called latching The creator of each viewpoint typically latches the viewpoint to a particular version of the source schematic This keeps t
171. called RISE with a value of 5 nanoseconds This represents the total rise time of the gate The instance body owns a property called MODEL with a value of INV This MODEL property tells the logic simulator to use a builtin primitive for an inverter As shown in the illustration properties have the following characteristic e Name Typically identifies the purpose of the property value The property name and surrounding box depicted in the illustration is never visible on the schematic or symbol The name is retrieved through the use of reports that are generated on the owner or value e Value Describes the design characteristic in the form of text The text may or may not be visible on the schematic If visible the text takes on the color of the owner If you select the text value and move it a rubber banding line will show you the owner object as shown in the illustration In some cases a property name may be defined and attached to an owner without defining a value The value is then defined later in a downstream application An example is assigning a pin number property pin_no to a logical symbol pin without declaring a value then allowing Board Station to assign a physical pin number when the design is physically packaged Type Identifies the kind of value that is valid for a particular property The valid types include string number expression and triplet Owner Properties can be restricted to being owned only by cer
172. cally pops up with your entry You may enter commands or functions in this fashion The name of the active window is shown on the left side of the COmmand window and the command or function you type must be defined within a scope that is visible to this window A history list is keep for this window With the Command window displayed type Ctrl P for previous to bring the last entry back into the window type Ctrl N to move forward in the history list and type Ctrl H to bring up a form with all the entries listed Select one and click OK For software versions prior to V8 4 type Alt BackSpace to bring back the previous entry Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 5 Customizing Exercises A 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Lab Exercises The following exercises are designed to show you how to customize the User Interface to increase your productivity Each exercise corresponds to a previous Module by the same number and should be considered an extra credit exercise Exercise 1 You will create a startup file for the bold_browser In the file you will place a setup_page function that will bring up two pages side by side upon invocation and allow you to turn two pages at a time when you click on the Page icons Exercise 2 Shows you how to create a startup file for the Design Architect Session Window In the file you will place a set_working_directory function that will exe
173. can be explicitly or implicitly named In the example on the opposite page the bundle is named Cable Clk Data 0 3 A bundle could also have been created just by defining the NET property value to be Clk Data 0 3 Once one bundle on a schematic is explicitly assigned a name like Cable Clk Data 0 3 you may assign the bundle name to other nets on the schematic just by specifying Cable Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 13 Additional Editing Features Explicit Rippers e Connect individual wires or sub buses from a bus or bundle to destination bus bundle or pin e A number of explicit symbols are available in the MGC_GENLIB rip component e Example of an 8X1 Ripper ave AE N eS e Each ripper has a Class property value of r e Example of a 1X1 ripper CLASS Property Wire End gt lt gt Value f T RULE Property R m Value lt 4 Bundle End 4 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Explicit Rippers Design Architect allows you to connect individual wires sub busses and bundles to other buses or bundles using explicit or implicit bus rippers In order to understand implicit bus rippers it is helpful to first understand explicit bus rippers Explicit bus rippers are primarily used in situations where two connecting wires have different NET names Explicit bus rippers are symbols that are instantiated on a sheet One end
174. card_reader an empty directory that will eventually be turned into a component container com contains some files that you will use later in this course component_lib contains some library components that you will use later in this course Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 69 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 70 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Exercise 2 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files During this training course you will have the opportunity perform several user interface customizing exercises You customize the user interface by creating ASCII files containing AMPLE code You then save these files in predefined locations In the following exercise you will be introduced to the Notepad editor which is a tool used in customizing Because the use of strokes will increase your productivity you will begin learning simple strokes that perform tasks like Copy Move and Delete These same strokes will be used throughout this course in applications like the Schematic Editor and the Simulator to perform similar tasks Creating a New File with Notepad 1 From the Design Manager Session Window choose MGC gt Notepad gt New A Notepad window appears on the screen identified by the name Notepad untitled in the title area Choose the Menu Bar View gt Wrap menu item Click the Word button under Mode
175. ce sheet of the parent instance is checked and saved to disk Changing the value of a Source_Edit_Allowed property through a back annotation has no effect The change must be made directly to the parent instance on the source sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 65 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Annotations vs Evaluations Design Architect MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Libraries Report Check View Help Select Filter c F Set Grid Snap Off Hide Grid Set Basepoint Set Autoroute Off Ripper Annotated Property Text Check Property Owner Type Net Comment Page Grid Report Color Annotations Evaluations Other Options Toggle Annotations Toggle Evaluations En Evaluations On Evaluations Off View evaluated properties from back annotation object and Annotations On schematic sheet View unevaluated properties from back annotation object and schematic sheet Annotations Off 6 66 View evaluated properties from schematic sheet View unevaluated properties from schematic sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Annotations vs Evaluations There are two menu items that control how properties are viewed on the schematic sheet The Setup gt Annotations Evaluations gt Toggle Evaluations menu item controls whether property valu
176. cel 654 Copy to Clipboard Undo i 852 vV 7412369 Palette Strokes Show Parent Palette Back Cut to Clipboard 4 Unselect 258 1236987 1478963 Show Top Palette Root 852 i Delete Close Window Other Strokes a saa Execute Last Menu l 12369 Draw Window Close Window rx 4 __p Execute Prompt Bar 75357 654 456 Cancel Prompt Bar Ta Move 654 74159 y Help on Strokes 123658 Stroke Recognition Grid Use the mouse to draw strokes while holding TIRAS down the middle mouse button and moving the mouse in the stroke path Strokes are 4 5 6 recognized by fitting the stroke path onto a 7189 3x3 grid which determines a numerical sequence Close Ref Help 1 30 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Quick Help on Strokes If you draw a question mark stroke in a Design Manager window the Quick Help on Strokes chart appears as shown on the facing page This chart defines the strokes that are available to you in that active window Strokes are one of the most productive methods for executing commands because all you have to do is wiggle the mouse in small patterns instead of moving the pointer half way across the screen to click a palette icon or reach a pulldown menu It is often helpful to make a photocopy of this form cut it up into strips and tape the strips on the edges of your display until you learn the strokes Aft
177. chematic sheet that you created in the last module Invoke Design Architect 1 Double click the design_arch icon in the Design Manager Tools window design_arch or type 8MGC_HOME bin da in a shell 2 Click the Maximize button to fill the screen with Design Architect 3 Verify the setting of the current working directory MGC gt Location Map gt Set Working Directory It should read lt home_directory gt training da_n card_reader If is doesn t set it to this value and click OK otherwise click Cancel Open the Symbol Editor on the my_dff Component 1 Click the OPEN SYMBOL icon OPEN SYMBOL The Open Symbol dialog box is displayed in the DA session area 2 Click the Navigator button navigate to and select the my_dff component then click OK 3 60 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Design Architect opens a new blank Symbol Editor window on the my_dff component The symbol is named my_dff by default because you did not specify an alternate name in the dialog box 3 Click the Maximize button on the Symbol Editor window Creating a Symbol Body Use the following figure to determine the size of the rectangle circles and lines that you will use to create a symbol body Place the symbol graphics exactly as shown in the figure e o o o o o o o o o o o o
178. chematics A B and C is copied from the first_design directory to the copied_design directory In the directory copied_design the references of A B and C now point to local locations The Design Manager automatically updates references If you did not use the Design Manager to copy the original references would have remained unchanged References to external objects are also copied You can optionally choose that the Design Manager copy the referenced objects into the copied design configuration instead of just copying the references Thus any design object referenced by the original design can optionally become part of the new design configuration However any references attached to outside objects that point to the original design remain the same that is they reference the original object and not the new copied object You need to understand the design well enough to decide whether the copied design should reference other objects like the original design or whether the copy should include the objects in the new configuration a If you copy a schematic or sheet model within a component you must register the newly copied model within Design Architect Note You will learn more about model registration later in this training course Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 7 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Moving and Deleting Design Objects e Resolved references are updated e Unresolved references remain unchanged e
179. ck the Close button Answer Yes to the Query form Save the modified code to a file named as follows HOME mec userware des_arch da_window ample NOTE If you haven t yet created the directory HOME mgc userware des_arch create it using the system function Otherwise use the Design Manager Add gt Directory pulldown menu item to make the directory before you save the file Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 19 Customizing Exercises Exercise 5 Add a Zoom to Previous Function Key Introduction Many times when you are working with a large dense schematic you want to zoom into an area of the schematic zoom in again then zoom back to the previous zoom In this exercise you will create a new function key definition called Zoom to Previous After you zoom into an area on a schematic witha stroke then zoom in again you will be able to return to the previous zoom by pressing this key Open a Define Userware Window in DA 1 A 20 From Design Architect invoke the Schematic Editor on the add_convert schematic you just created Make sure the Schematic Window is active highlighted in blue Execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Userware gt Load Navigate to the HOME training da_n ample_source directory and click on zoom_to_previous ample Execute the Navigator form with a gt stroke The AMPLE code from the file is loaded into the schematic scope While observing the F4s label ar
180. ck to End Paor roue t 3 Click Route Selected Icon SELECTED e Choose Setup gt Set Autoroute On to autoroute nets as they are drawn 2 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Autorouting Nets You can automatically route nets as they are drawn or you can manually select and route the existing nets later The net router defines a pathway for a connected net that avoids instance extents comment objects and other nets utilizing the pin snap grid as the routing grid If net vertices are not on the grid they are not routed If you create a straight net between two pins then click the ROUTE SELECTED icon the autorouter will attempt to route the selected net If you execute the Setup gt Set Autoroute On pulldown menu item the autorouter will route each net as you draw it Routing performance is faster if the pin snap grid is initially set to a value larger than one pin interval during the route operation and then set back for component instantiation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 29 Creating a Schematic Net Connection Rules e Automatic connections are made when nets are created and instances are placed e When Manipulating objects such as move and copy o Connectivity is preserved o No new connections are made at pin vertex intersections e Not dots D o Are non electrical graphical indicators showing that no connect
181. cute upon DA invocation and remind you to verify the setting of the working directory Exercise 3 You will overload the set_working_directory function with pre defined userware from an ASCII file The new userware will add a Navigator button to the form and make the entry box longer to accommodate longer pathnames After you compile the new function you will save the code in your personal userware directory Exercise 4 You will change the Modify Property stroke from to which is much easier to draw especially with an optical mouse You will then save this customization in you personal Design Architect userware file so it will always be there when you invoke either the Schematic or Symbol Editor Exercise 5 You will create a new function key definition called Zoom to Previous After you zoom into an area on a large schematic witha stroke then zoom in again you will be able to return to the previous zoom by pressing this key Exercise 6 This exercise is a departure from customizing In this exercise you will be given a broken hierarchical design and be challenged to fix it Before Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 7 Customizing Exercises you start the exercise you are encouraged to examine the broken data with your instructor and discuss several strategies on how to fix it A 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Exercise 1 Creating a startup file
182. d 6 Double click on the my_dff component icon then click on the my_dff Default component interface name 7 Double click on each model in the Registered Model Info window to reveal the labels The window should appear as follows 7 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Cc TRAINING da_ n card_r card_reader Default Graphical Models access_chk TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff add_convert default_sym ce analog Functional Models ___ card_reader 5 aT ES Qa feari t ader my_dff schematic freq_det schematic c my_dff eefault Double click my_dff Default to See Labels i e my_dff 7 m part schematic part IL dv pcb_design_vpt p pcb_design_vpt schematic ein_vbt qfall 10 ye S m_ P qbfall 0 6 sim_vpt qrise 5 qbrise 0 model schematic v z a LT al i 1 Examine the my_dff component interface structure It should appear as shown in the illustration above 2 Close the Component window Open a Schematic Window on my_dff 1 Activate the DA Session window and click the OPEN SHEET icon 2 Navigate to and select the my_dff component then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 33 Component Interfaces and Registration 3 Click OK on the Open Sheet form
183. d at the specified pathname location The Design Architect session window changes as follows to accommodate schematic editing tasks Menu bar at top Contains the names of the Session pulldown menus use the Select left or Menu right mouse button to access a pulldown menu Active Symbol window Located to the upper right corner of the client area displays the currently active symbol Palette menu Located to the right center of the client area contains icons providing common functionality associated with the active schematic window Context window Located in the lower right corner of the client area displays where the edit window is located relative to the extent of the sheet being edited Softkeys Located above the message area contains text describing the function keys for the active window Message area Displays notes warnings and errors Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 9 Creating a Schematic Elements of a Schematic Schematic 1 my_dff sheet1 i m Property Value 2 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Elements of a Schematic A schematic is a functional model of an electronic circuit that is made up of the following elements e Instances of symbols An instance is like an active reflection of a symbol in a library There may be more than one instance of the same symbol on a sheet Instances have a body colored blue and pins color
184. dex Number y New Suffix Step By 1 X Sequence Type i lt 2 Fillin Form Auto Manual Text will be sequenced top to bottom left to right 3 Click OK ox Reset Cancel 4 Select Property Text 4 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features The Sequence Text Function The sequence text function provides a quick way to assign values to properties such as RULE properties The procedure is as follows 1 Click the SEQUENCE TEXT icon on the schematic_text palette 2 Fillin the form Specify the beginning index number and the increment for each step A Prefix or Suffix can also be specified For example a prefix of D generates numbers like D1 D2 and so on If you click Manual you assign the incrementing numbers by clicking on each piece of property text otherwise the numbers are assigned automatically top to bottom left to right 3 Click on OK 4 Select all the property values to be assigned with the bounding box or for manual assignment click on each piece of text one at a time Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 25 Additional Editing Features Implicit Ripper aD 2 Double Click A Implicit Ripper Added NET property value added Choose Bus Bit Bus Name BUS 0 7 Bit 6 4 a 4 3 Enter bit number Cancel Reset 4
185. dff Available Value Changes VALUE_MODIFIED properties unchanged all others reset Version Attribute Changes unchanged Instance Specific Props remain 0 Existing New Sheet Value Changes reset to symbol Auto Update Mode Attribute Changes reset to symbol A a Instance Specific Props discard SY Auto None Clear OK Reset Cancel 5 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Update Options You can explicitly specify how you want the instances on a sheet to be updated via the Auto Update Mode buttons as shown on the left You can also specify how the instances should be updated individually within the Update and Replace commands by choosing one of the following switches e Auto Property value changes VALUE_MODIFIED properties remain unchanged and all other properties are reset to the current symbol value Property attribute changes property attributes changed on the instance remain unchanged Instance specific properties are kept This is the default when updating a symbol instance e None no update This option is available only when the sheet is opened No instances are updated This is the default mode when the sheet is opened e Clear Property value changes resets all symbol specific property values to the current symbol value Property attribute changes all attributes are reset to the symbol property attributes All instance specific properti
186. e 3 Click on the BOLD Browser Maximize button Maximize Beri Note some window environments may have a menu choice that performs this function Open a Transcript Window 1 Execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Transcript gt Show Transcript The function show_transcript should appear as the last entry in the window A 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Setup the Session Window for Up Down Tiling 1 Click on the session window border as shown in the following illustratioin to activate the session window Click Here to Activate Session Window BOLD Browser p MGC File Edit Search Setup Report Help JBZ Customizing the Common User Interface PINU 2 Execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Setup gt Session 3 Click the Up Down Tiling radio button then execute the form with a stroke Execute the setup_page Function in BOLD 1 Choose the pulldown menu Setup gt Page Layout 2 Click the following radio buttons Number of pages to view lt 2 page Rate to turn pages 2 3 Execute the form with a gt stroke 4 Observe the setup_page function now appears at the bottom of the transcript Copy the Transcript to the System Clipboard 1 Activate the Transcript Window and highlight the last three lines as follows a Click on the Transcript Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 11 Customizing Exerci
187. e you made a local copy of the training data from a master location but you did not check the references after you copied the data If there were broken references in the master copy of the data possibly due to not being checked after being loaded from tape the broken references will be copied to your local location In this exercise you will check for broken references in your local copy of the training data 1 From the Design Manager Navigator window select the da_n icon in your local training directory 2 Click on the CHECK REFS icon CHECK REFS Design Manager searches the entire directory structure from that point down Were any broken references found If so what are the references If broken references are reported fill in the form as follows to repair the broken reference s 1 Use the Navigator to navigate down to the indicated design object and find the true pathname 2 Replace the broken pathname segment For example if the segment lib should be component_lib then enter something like replace lib and2 with component_lib and2 Make sure that the pathname segment is unique to the branch you are on 3 Click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 29 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 30 Design Manager replaces all old broken reference segments with the new reference segment you specified Design Manager than asks if you want to check for more broken references Click on
188. e Changes the default values for property attributes e See results next time a property is added e Setup gt Property Text displays schematic version Setup Property Text Set Font stroke Menu psan Set Transparency On Set Height 0 125 y Off Set Orientation 0 Set Vertical Justification Set Horizontal Justification z Top Left Center xv Center Bottom Right Set Stability Switch Set Visibility Switch Variable Visible Fixed xv Hidden Protected y NonRemovable OK Reset Cancel 3 54 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Setting Up Property Text Attributes The Setup gt Property Text menu item lets you change property text attributes used when adding properties in the Symbol Editor and the Schematic Editor After the menu item has been chosen a Setup Property Text dialog box is displayed You can change the following attributes Font Name of a registered font family available on your workstation Height A positive non zero number that specifies the height of the property text Orientation Value of 0 horizontal or 90 vertical that specifies the orientation Transparency If text transparency is on objects under a text string are visible if text transparency is off objects under a text string are hidden Vertical Justification Specifies the vertical justification Hori
189. e Explore Contents button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 27 Using Design Manager to Release Designs The contents of the schematic directory is displayed in the Navigator window 1 Click on the sheet1 icon and click the Explore References button A report window is displayed m To what other object s does sheet1 reference n Click on the Explore Back to Parent button to close the report window 7 View the design viewpoint and back annotation objects under the card_reader component a Traverse up the design hierarchy until you are directly below the card_reader component b Click on the sim_vpt design viewpoint icon then click the Explore References button A report window is displayed c To what other object s does the sim_vpt design viewpoint reference d Close the report window then click on Explore Back to Parent e Click on the default back annotation icon then click the Explore References button A report window is displayed f To what other object s does the default back annotation object reference g Close the report window then click on Explore Back to Parent 8 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Exercise 2 Verifying and Changing References Whenever you move design data from a different location especially from a different network it is a good practice to verify that all references resolve correctly In Module 1 of this cours
190. e form as shown above 6 Click OK Notice that all the rise property values change to inv_rise Zoom into a window area if you need a closer look 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 and change the fall property values to the expression inv_fall 6 92 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 8 Click the ADD PARAM icon on the SETUP palette he ADD PARAM Add Parameter Property Type Name inv_rise String Number Value 5 x Expression y Triplet _oK Reset Cancel 9 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK Notice that the rise property value on all inverter instances in the design changes to 5 Also notice that inv_rise 5 has been added to the PARAMETER rule 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 and add the inv_fall parameter with a value of 10 to the viewpoint parameter rule Notice that the fall value on all the inverter instances changes to 10 Save the Viewpoint 1 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Save Design Viewpoint Latch the Viewpoint 1 From the pulldown menu choose EDIT gt Latch Version gt Latch Version 2 Verify that the ALL button is selected then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 93 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Generate a Report on the Latched Objects 1 From the pulldown menu choose Report gt References 2 Maximize the
191. e of S R_LATCH 3 8 ao af 0 Component z l Structure a k 1 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Component within a Component The picture on the facing page illustrates how a new design is created by placing components within a component Two component structures are shown one named S R_LATCH and the other named MY_DESIGN The component named S R_LATCH contains a symbol model and a functional model and is typical of a component that might be found in a library A new component structure is created when you open a new schematic sheet with Design Architect The new component in the picture is called MVY_DESIGN In this case the image of the S R_LATCH component symbol is placed on the new schematic Each image is called an instance of the S R_LATCH and can be thought of as an active reflection of the S R_LATCH symbol located in the library Each instance of the S R_LATCH is considered different than the symbol body because some of the characteristics of each instance can be changed once the instance is placed on the new sheet Additionally each instance can also be viewed as linked to the symbol body which allows each instance to be collectively or individually updated after changes are made to the symbol body in the library Once you create a new schematic design you can create a symbol to represent it In this ca
192. e of the GLOBAL property defines the net name as VCC The INIT property is attached to the pin and causes the simulator to initialize the pin to a logic 1 drive strength STRONG and a force type of FIXED To the right of the VCC symbol in the diagram is a net The net vertex owns a NET property with a value of vec This causes a connection with the VCC global net even though there is no physical connection between the net and the pin on the VCC instance Attaching Nets to PCB Power Planes PCB power planes are represented by net names that are defined as global If a net is attached to something other than a global net the net is treated as a normal trace on the signal layer Other Global Nets Global nets can also be defined for things like clocks and set reset lines How would you create a global net for a Master Reset line Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 39 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common Digital Simulation Properties e Properties on Symbol Pins o PINTYPE o RISE o FALL o DRIVE e Properties on Symbol Bodies o MODEL o MODELFILE e The instance specific property values can be changed in the downstream analysis tool e You can back annotate changed values to the source schematic using Design Architect 3 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common Digital Simulation Properties Mentor Graphics provides a list of predefined prope
193. e of which is LATCH The LATCH component is represented by a schematic with primitives components that have no schematic Looking at the highest level schematic the state of development of the other three functional blocks is unknown Each block could be empty only containing a symbol each could be supported by a high level behavioral model or each could be fully developed like the CTRL block Design Architect supports both top down and bottom design methodologies as well as anything in between In the illustration on the left any one of the component structures in the hierarchy could be developed first followed by any of the others in random order Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Functional Blocks e Rectangular symbols used to represent major partitions at the higher levels of a design e The blocks can be created right on the sheet using symbol editor functionality osc ADDRESS_IN FREQ_DET _CLR START PULSE LATCH ACCESS_CHK osc RED_LED SERIAL_OUT a DATA_BUS 15 0 RED LED START PULSE LATCH RF_IN READ RF_IN _CLR ANALOG GREEN_LED CLR GREEN_LED START ULSE ATCH o CLR ACCESS 15 0 ADDRESS_IN READ ADD_CONVERT schematic e A behavioral model or a schematic model usually supports each block during simulation
194. e pin XINST 3 A 3 0 will be attached to the net DATA 15 12 2 The net CLK will attach to the CLK pin on each repeated instance 3 The pin XINST 0 B 3 0 will be attached to the net NEW 3 0 as will the pin XINST 1 B 3 0 and so on 4 The pin XINST 0 X will be attached to the net X Q the pin XINST 1 X will be attached to the net X 1 and so on 5 The pin XINST 0 D 1 0 will be attached to the NetBundle Bund N1 N2 as will the pin XINST 1 D 1 0 and so on Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 33 Additional Editing Features Selection Sets e Open selection set list of currently selected objects e Closed selection set list of objects in previous selection set e Added to list graphics text instances nets and selected objects e Selection set closed when objects are manipulated e Closed selection set accessed by o Select gt Reopen Selection o Select gt Reselect 4 34 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Selection Sets Two selection sets are maintained 1 The open selection set Contains a list of the currently selected objects 2 The closed selection set Contains a list of objects that were selected in the previously opened selection set Objects placed in an editor window such as instances nets comments and properties are added to the open selection set at creation time if auto selection is on and the additive selected mode is used Objects
195. e value of the property the property has the VALUE_MODIFIED flag and the ATTRIBUTE_MODIFIED flag by default attached to it The status of these flags are displayed with the other property information in a report window A property value on an instance becomes VALUE_MODIFIED when one of the following actions occur The designer changes a property value with the Add Instance Add Property Change Text Value Change Property Value or Delete command The designer marks the property value as VALUE_MODIFIED using the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Mark Property Value You can unmark the property value as VALUE_MODIFIED using the same command Marking the value as VALUE_MODIFIED means that the property will be written out to the database as being owned by the instance just as if you added an instance specific property to the instance This means that if you update the instance to use the most current version of the symbol and the symbol property values have changed the instance property values will not be affected by the symbol property changes Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 17 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Update Options Open Sheet Component Name HOME straining da_n card_reader my_dff Navigator Sheet sheet leary Startup File Path A Open Sheet Options Component training da_n card_reader add_convert my_
196. ea in the softkey area click on the DA Session window then on the Schematic window Notice the label Zoom to Previous is added to the SHIFT F4 position Execute a stroke in the Schematic Window to include all elements of the schematic Zoom into the add_convert circuit by executing a stroke across the circuit portion leaving out the border Zoom in again on the 74161A instance witha 4 stroke Press the SHIFT F4 function key and notice that the zoom changes back to the previous zoom Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Browsing the Zoom to Previous Code Zoom to Previous Function Declare two variables to allow you to save view area coordinates extern last_upper VOID extern last_lower VOID function to save current view coordinates s before viewing a new area this is original source with new code added to capture the window extents function stroke_159 INDIRECT if end_loc undefined if end_loc void if end_loc 2 start_loc 2 modification to save current view area local extents get_view_area get the two coordinates last_upper extents 0 _ save each coordinate separately in extern var last_lower extents 1 to allow other functions to see values end of modification view_area start_loc end_loc else message Stroke started and ended in different windows Could not view area
197. ead lt home_directory gt training da_n card_reader If for some reason it doesn t set it to this value and click OK otherwise click Cancel Create a New my_dff Component Structure and Open a Sheet 1 Click the OPEN SHEET icon SHEET The Open Sheet dialog box is displayed in the DA session area 2 After Component Name enter lt home_directory gt training da_n card_reader my_dff Notice that the first sheet will be named sheet1 by default 3 Press the Return key or click OK Design Architect creates a new component structure called my_dff and opens a Schematic Editor Window on a new blank schematic sheet 4 Click the Schematic Editor Window Maximize button Add an Instance of the Latch Symbol to the Sheet 1 Click the LIBRARY icon 2 62 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic A list of Mentor Graphics libraries is displayed 2 Click gen_lib A list of gen_lib components is displayed 3 If the scroll bars on the right side of the palettes are not displayed press the Right mouse button and execute Show Scroll Bars 4 Place the cursor on the lower arrowhead beneath the right scroll bar Press and hold the Left mouse button until the latch component scrolls into view 5 Click on latch You will see the latch symbol
198. eck gt Schematic gt Set Defaults Design Architect Libraries Report Check View Help Sheet Schematic eS Set Defaults Parameters Report gt With Defaults As Specified Set Defaults y e Displays Default Schematic Check Settings Errors Errors No File Mode A Warnings Only Check A Sf Add Replace No File Schematic Interface _ i OA File da_check_file Schematic Special Ff G amp Schematic Instance m Display in Window Schematic Net m Write to Transcript OK Reset Cancel 4 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Setting Check Levels for Schematics You can check all the sheets associated with a particular schematic using the default check levels by selecting the Check gt Schematic gt With Defaults menu item This level of check is useful for checking connectivity across sheets and doing other levels of user defined checks Interface Checks to verify a symbol pin matching a net on a schematic a port on schematic matching a symbol pin a symbol pin matching a port on a schematic Special instances Checks on offpage connectors checks nets with same name on different sheets connected using on offpage connectors Instances Checks for valid Inst property values Nets Checks to verify net and global have the same name shorted global net You can specify a
199. ection set is closed and still defined The next selection will discard that selection set to open a new selection set Each sheet or symbol opened has its own open selection set If you select objects in one sheet and then activate a different window on another sheet and select new objects objects in the previous sheet remain selected Selection Filter Whether or not an object is selectable is defined by the selection filter which is used in point and area selection This filter is ignored when you use the menus or the F1 Select Area Any or F2 Unselect All function keys For example property text is not selectable by default If you move the cursor on a property text and click the Select mouse button the property text remains unselected However if you press the F1 function key the property text becomes selected Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 37 Creating a Schematic Select Filter e Specifies object types for selection e Used only with mouse point selection e Use p stroke to bring up form e Or click the 2 38 SET SE FILT LE ER CT button on the palette Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Select Filter The select filter controls what objects are currently selectable from the mouse pointer It is not use with the F1 Select Area Any function key When you change the type of objects that are selectable through the Setup Select Filter dialog b
200. ed If the sheet is re opened in the Auto Mode the top property has its Value Modified flag set its value remains unchanged The bottom property has its Attribute Modified flag set but its value was not modified the value remains unchanged and the location remains unchanged The right property was modified at the symbol level its value changes to 10 What would happen to the value of the right property if the value on the instance was marked as Value Modified with the Miscellaneous gt Mark Property Value pulldown menu item Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 21 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Generating a Symbol from a Schematic Generate Symbol Component Name training da_n card_reader 5 Symbol Name card_reader lt a 1 Enter Replace existing Once generated Activate symbol v Yes v Save Symbol Yes No Edit Symbol A No 2 Click Save and Edit Symbol must be saved Choose Source Pinlist File Schematic 3 Navigate L N Component Name training da_n card_reader Navigator Schematic Name Current Shape box Pi P in Spacing in pin grids 2 Shape Arguments m NS Sort Pins vV Choose Shape cl Yes No 8 Click gt OK Reset Cancel g Choose a Symbol Shape lt 4 Click Shape And Gate Or Gate Xor Gate Buffer Box AndOr OrAnd
201. ed 3 20 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Saving the Symbol You choose the File gt Save Symbol pulldown menu item to save your symbol to disk Always check your symbol before you save it If your symbol is not successfully checked it can still be saved to disk but it cannot be instantiated Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 21 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 3 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Lesson 2 Adding Properties Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 23 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties What is a Property e A name value pair Typically attached to a design object e Conveys information that can t be represented graphically e Can be used to establish horiz vert connectivity Structured Logic Design properties Has the following characteristics Property Name _ Property Value not visible Property 4 name value pair Property Owner Property Type string 3 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties What is a Property A property is a name value pair that is typically attached to a design object Properties define design characteristics that cannot be easily represented graphically on a schematic For example in the illustration to the left the output pin on the inverter owns a property
202. ed in size to 1 2 the pin grid spacing 3 Draw a U stroke 4 to unselect all Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 79 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Verify that the Property Values are Placed Correctly Sin ce all four property values are the same value zero you can t tell just by looking at them that they are placed correctly Do a quick check as follows 1 2 5 Che l Click the TE XT icon Select the top piece of property text that you just added and read the message in the message window The message should verify that the property is qrise Select the property text that is second from the top The message should verify that the property is qfall Select the next two property values one at a time and verify that they are qbrise and qbfall respectively Click the Cancel button on the prompt bar to exit TE XT mode ck the Symbol Check your symbol for errors or warnings Check gt With Defaults The following Check Status window is displayed showing the results of the symbol check Notice that the check window displays several warnings These warnings indicate that the symbol has changed but the component interface table has not yet been updated This is normal Check Symbol my_dff my_dff A Check Body 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Interfac 0 errors 5 warnings MGC required Warning Property qbrise on the
203. ed magenta The pins on an instance are different than the pins on the symbol because they have a builtin net vertex a place for attaching nets e Nets The term net is short for network A net is a wiring connection between two or more instance pins The term net refers to either a single wire or a collection of wires called a bus A bus is sometimes called a bundle or a wide net A net may contain net vertices corner points net segments the piece between two vertices and net junctions Properties A property is a name value pair text that represents a characteristic of the schematic that can t be represented graphically Properties are typically attached to an owner object and take on the color of that object Only the value of the property is visible on the schematic For example in the schematic on the left the net in the upper left corner has a NET property with a value of PRE PRE is yellow the color of the net the owner Attached to the output pin of each inverter are two properties with the value of 0 and 0 Since only the values are shown you can t tell what the names of the properties are just by looking at them By convention the upper value is usually the RISE time property and the lower is FALL time Later you will be shown a way to quickly gather information on an unknown property value Comment text and graphics These objects are non electrical display information colored green The sheet bord
204. ed on and prevents these version from being deleted by the version manager The purpose is to provide a stable environment for design team members that are working with downstrean analysis tools Reports can be generated on any or all the objects being viewed through the viewpoint Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 43 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Schematic View Window rah 4 eS Click Icon OPEN SHEET 3 sheet1 d E OSC ADDRESS_IN FREQ DET _CLR 93E ACCESS_CHK SERIAL_OUT PESER DATA_BUS 15 0 PE NALog READ GREEN LED JCLR ADDRESSIN READ a e ACCESS 15 0 V ADD_CONVERT Select Object to 7 schematic Change Property 6 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Schematic View Window You can view the design source for schematics and VHDL models by clicking on the OPEN SHEET icon as shown on the left This window appears like a Schematic View window in Design Architect but it is slightly different In this window you can only add change or delete non SLD properties by selecting the property owner object and executing the appropriate command from the EDIT palette or the popup menu An alternate and sometimes quicker method of changing a property value is to place the cursor on a property value as shown on the left and press SHIFT F7 Design Architect
205. ematic 10 schematic_add_route Palette__ 12 iv Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Design Architect Strokes ___ SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 14 Placing an Instance on a Sheet 2 16 Mentor Graphics Libraries 18 Using the Choose Symbol Option 20 The Active Symbol 8 2 Adding Nets D4 Net Creation Process 6 Autorouting Nets 8 Net Connection Rules SSS 30 Connecting and Disconnecting Net Vertices 2 32 Naming Nets 3 4 Selection Concepts S 2 36 Select Filter S 2 38 Using the Select Popup Menus ___ 2 40 Manipulating Objects ____ 2 42 Interwindow Copy and Move 2 44 The Context Window ____ OO 2 46 Checking the Sheet SSS 2 48 Saving the Sheet 2 50 Schematic Editor Window Status Line __ _ SSS 2 52 Using the Component Hierarchy Window _____ P 514 Using the Component Window ___SSSSS C 2 56 Lab Overview __ 58 Lab Exercises____ 59 Objectives__ ___ 2 59 Print Out the Lab Exercises____ 8 59 Exercise 1 Creating a Schematic_____ SSS S CSCSC CSSSSS CU 2 6 Exercise 2 Net Connection Rules gt gt 2 70 Exercise 3 Changing the Mouse Selection Filter _ 2 71 Exercise 4 Browsing a Component in the Component Hierarchy Window 2 73 Exercise 5 Browsing a Component in the Component Window____ 2 74 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 v Table of Conte
206. en you initiate a search for a word or word phrase the BOLD Browser searches this index rather than scanning through the text of all the documents at search time This type of search is significantly faster than textual scans You can specify that BOLD search for specific needs such as the following Whether the word is part of a compound word Determine letter case e Find variant forms of hyphenated words and plural forms e Restrict the search through certain document or a bookcase When the BOLD Browser locates the occurrences of the word s you requested it displays a Search Results window where you can see a list of documents containing the term You can click on the document titles to disclose lists of pages where the term occurs Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 47 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 5 Using Design Manager to Copy Objects Changing the location of your design data in the file system should always be done with Design Manager This lesson explains why you need to use Design Manager and how to successfully copy objects Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 49 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Copying Objects in the Navigator Window Design
207. ent interface table is updated Because the ports on the schematic may no longer match the pins on the symbol the schematic model is automatically marked Not Valid In order to run the Validation routine and verify that the schematic ports still match the pins on the symbol you must check and resave the sheet 1 Double click on the Schematic window icon in the DA Session Window 2 From the pulldown menu choose Check gt Sheet gt With Defaults 3 Close the Check Window with a _ stroke 4 From the pulldown menu choose File gt Save Sheet gt Default Registration 5 Close the Schematic Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 81 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Exercise 4 Browsing the my_dff Component in the Component Window It is helpful to understand the internal structure and content your design You will be observing and changing this structure throughout this training course The following exercise will give you more practice using the Component window 1 Click on the COMP WINDOW icon D ERE COMP WINDOW 2 Select the my_dff component in the Navigator window and click OK mahne a e a ai l Jusers traintAraining da Bl my dff Default c e my_dff part 1 schematic schem_id gt sheet1 Notice that the component now contains three objects the part object the schematic and t
208. enter radius 2 Press button at center drag release at radius point Two Point Line initial end 2 Press button at one end drag to other end release Dot point 1 Click at dot location Text text location point 1 Enter text in prompt bar drag image of text and click at desired text location Objects placed in the symbol edit area are automatically selected by default You can turn auto selection mode off by choosing Setup gt Other Options gt Autoselect Off To turn auto selection back on again choose Setup gt Other Options gt Autoselect On this menu item is a toggle You can also resize an object by using the STRETCH feature Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Setting the Symbol Body Defaults e To set defaults use Setup gt Symbol Body Setup Symbol Body Eine es Line Width Text Font stroke Menu Solid 1 pixel Acts ea ge tes Text Height 0 75 Long Dash 5 pixels n Short Dash 7 pixels Text Orientation 0 Vertical Justification Horizontal Justification pe Set Orth Top Left c Cent oe enter Center ia Off Bottom Right Fill Type Dot Size 0 1 Text Transparency Ww YP A Clear Dot Style On A y Solid Square v Off Stipple Circle OK Reset Cancel 3 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creat
209. er and title block not shown are examples of comment text and graphics Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 11 Creating a Schematic schematic_add_ route Palette e Default palette displayed on invocation Select Another Palette Common Tasks Palette Popup Menu 2 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic schematic_add_route Palette The ADD ROUTE palette is the main palette used for creating the graphic elements of a schematic The most common tasks for manipulating graphic objects are represented by the blue buttons near the top The icons in the lower portion also represent common tasks that will be discussed later in this module The palette area has a popup menu that allows you to reconfigure what you see If the palette area is squeezed on the screen so that you can t see all the icons you can add scroll bars Another option is to hide the context window or the active symbol window to make the palette area longer Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 13 Creating a Schematic Design Architect Strokes Quick Help on Strokes Common Design Architect Strokes Schematic Strokes YAL 1475963 Activate Window 5 View Centered Double Click MMB View Area 159 View All 951 Zoom In 2 357 Zoom Out 2 753 Refresh 75357 l Select Window Copy 3214789 Copy Multiple 9874123 E ly Vv a gt Dele
210. er string e Number An integer real or exponential number e Expression A combination of variables constant values and arithmetic or logical operators defined by AMPLE expression syntax For example the expression x 5 contains a variable x a constant value 5 and an arithmetic operator Expressions are typically used to redefine property values in commonly used components without having to redesign the component Expressions can also be used within the range specification for a net or pin name net and pin property values Variables in expressions are evaluated as needed For example expressions are evaluated when a sheet is checked or when a design viewpoint is created with an expression defined o Triplet The special property type triplet is a 3 valued property used to describe the best case typical worst case timing values used in timing analysis The three values of a triplet can be separated by commas or spaces for example 5 7 10 The value whether entered as a string number or an expression type is evaluated as a number If one value is specified it is used for the best case worst case and typical values If two values are specified the first value is used for the best case value and the second value is for worst case and typical values It is important for you to know what the property type is before assigning a property value to a particular property For example if the prope
211. er you use the strokes over time you will remember them and they will come to you naturally almost without thinking Many of the strokes that you will learn from this chart will carry over to other applications so they are well with the effort to learn Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 31 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Transcript Window Click Here Design Manager i E MGC Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help Session Transcript _ SEU Sset_active_window to H H Sminimize_window ES set_active_window se see nian Sunselect_all Sset_active_window to m Supdate_window Sselect_tool desig JAGRA MONITOR Ssetup_invoke_tool MG extern qual_script message Invoking E writeln net tria ws fae net triassic scra NAVIGATE TOOLS Sinvoke_tool net Sset_active_window se ee Screate_notepad E Sset_active_window MERS ate SSclose_window dis Error stroke_258 Error Binding no Z gt E Sunselect_all CONFIG TRASH Sset_active_window se Sselect_tool ic Ssetup_invoke_tool MG z i BR Sea COPY MOVE FastScan FlexTest
212. erarchy i Editing Features Module 4 e Using the Design aS Viewpoint Editor y e Managing Back odule 5 Annotations Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks e Forward Annotating y Reusable Sheets Working with e Merging Annotations Design Viewpoints Module 6 with the Source Sheet Component Interfaces and Registration Module 7 l
213. erface table is searched next During each step in the search up the design tree the value of a parameter may be overridden by a back annotation specified in a connected back annotation object If more than one back annotation object is connected the BA objects are search in prioritized order After the parent instance on the top sheet is searched the design viewpoint Parameters list is searched If a value is still not found a corresponding technology file if registered to the top level component and then the library data technology file if registered with the top level component is searched for the parameter If the value is still not found or if the technology files do not exist an error is issued Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 33 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Defining Primitive Instances e To add a primitive level click icon Ee app HMO PRIM e Fill out Form Add Primitive Property Type Name primitive String Except Flag v Number OFF Value empty_block v Expression nz ON y Triplet OK Reset Cancel e If no primitive rules exist the evaluation stops at instances that have no models 6 34 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Defining Primitive Instances The design evaluation progresses from the highest hierarchical level to a stoppi
214. erty value substitutes e Defining what additional properties are visible to the Design File Interface Connecting and disconnecting back annotation objects Connecting a back annotation object created in one tool to a viewpoint created in another tool is how information is transferred between tools e Changing the priority of a back annotation object Any change to a property value that is recorded in the highest priority back annotation object overrides all other changes made to the same property in other connected back annotation objects The highest priority back annotation object is that one that is connect last and is listed as number 1 in the Design Viewpoint window This object is also called the active back annotation object because all new changes are recorded in this object A lower priority back annotation object is made the highest priority by first disconnecting the object then re connecting it back again Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 29 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Adding Parameters to the Viewpoint e Click Icon ETAM ADD PARAM e Fill out Form 6 30 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Adding Parameters to the Viewpoint A parameter is a named value for a variable that is passed to an expression from the outside A parameter may be defined as another property attached to an object higher
215. es are removed This is the default when replacing a symbol instance Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 19 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Update Example Update Mode on Next OPEN SHEET Time 1 Symbol is Created Clear Mode Time 2 Instance Created on Sheet yr Auto Mode A ie Attribute Change Time 3 Symbol is Modified 5 20 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Update Example The left side of the example on the facing page sets the stage for describing the results of updating a symbol instance when the sheet is re opened The scenario is as follows Time 1 A symbol is created with the properties top bottom and right Time 2 An instance of the inverter is placed on a sheet The value of top is changed to 5 which sets the Value Modified flag and the Attribute Modified flag for this property The value of bottom is moved to the left this sets the Attribute Modified flag for bottom A new instance specific property with a value of INV2 is also added The property value of right is selected and marked as Value Modified Time 3 The inverter symbol is re opened and the value of right is changed to 10 The symbol is then checked and re saved to disk If the sheet is re opened in the Clear Mode the instance is updated to match the revised symbol The instance specific property is discard
216. es are displayed in their unevaluated or evaluated form Design Architect uses the design configuration rules defined in the design viewpoint to resolve and evaluate the properties The Setup gt Annotations Evaluations gt Toggle Annotations changes the current state of viewing to either viewing properties from the back annotation object or viewing properties on the schematic sheet only The results of the annotation and evaluation settings are displayed in the table on the facing page If evaluations and annotations are both set to on the sheet displays evaluated properties from both the back annotation object and the schematic sheet If evaluations are on and annotations are off the sheet displays evaluated properties from the schematic sheet only back annotations are not displayed If evaluations are off and annotations are on the sheet displays unevaluated properties from both the back annotation object and the schematic sheet If both evaluations and annotations are off the sheet displays unevaluated properties from the schematic sheet If you change or add a property value as an expression and evaluations are set to on and you would like to see the new property expression in its evaluated state but you must first execute the Miscellaneous gt Recalculate Properties menu item Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 67 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing and Editing Properties e Design
217. ess of value is considered primitive no schematic underneath You may add additional parameters primitive definitions substitutions or visible properties by using the palette icons and the Design Configuration window popup menu Add gt The next several pages outline this process Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 27 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Tasks that can only be done with DVE e Browse the design configuration rules of a design viewpoint e Changing the design configuration rules for a design viewpoint o Define additional parameters at the viewpoint level o Define addition properties that set the level of primitiveness for the design o Define what additional properties are to be visible to the Design File Interface o Specifying property value substitutes e Connect and disconnect back annotation objects e Change the priority of back annotation objects 6 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Tasks that can only be done with DVE There are certain tasks that can only be done with the Design Viewpoint Editor These tasks are listed as follows e Browsing the design configuration rules specified for a viewpoint Changing the design configuration rules of a viewpoint e Defining additional properties that set the primitive level of the design e Defining global parameters in the viewpoint Defining prop
218. et Working Directory Form appears after the window comes up 2 Verify the working directory is set to HOME training da_n and press Return 3 Close the Design Architect window when you are finished A 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Exercise 3 Add a Navigator Button to the Set Working Directory Form Introduction You have been using the MGC gt Location Map gt Set Working Directory prompt bar to set your working directory In the following exercise you will overload the default set_working_directory function with new code that will add a Navigator button and make the entry box longer to accommodate longer pathnames Open a Define Userware Window 1 7 From any application window such as Design Manager Design Architect or BOLD Browser activate the session area and execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Userware gt Define A new untitled AMPLE Userware window appears From the pulldown menu bar execute File gt Import Navigate to the HOME training da_n ample_source directory and click on set_working_directory ample Execute the Navigator form with a _ stroke The AMPLE code from the file is imported to the Define Userware window Place the mouse cursor in the AMPLE Userware window press the right mouse button and execute Compile A message stating that All text compiled successfully appears in the message window Test the new form by activating the sess
219. ewpoint interactively Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation How Viewpoints are Created A design viewpoint can be created in several ways as illustrated on the left page Auto Tool Mode In most cases simply invoking a downstream tool like QuickSim II PCB PACKAGE or IC Station on the source design causes the tool to create a default design viewpoint for you if the design has no viewpoint If a viewpoint already exits for the tool and it has the default name for that tool then the tool automatically invokes on that viewpoint Batch script Mode Some companies and ASIC vendors provide shell scripts that you invoke to generate a custom viewpoint that fits the design process and libraries being used The script usually contains AMPLE code that invokes the Design Viewpoint Editor in nodisplay mode and executes the necessary DVE functions to set the design configuration global parameters and visible properties list e TimeBase Mode TimeBase is a Mentor Graphics subprogram that is used to calculate timing When you invoke TimeBase directly on a design TimeBase creates a persistent saved to disk default viewpoint and back annotation object calculates the timing then saves the Timing Cache file in the design viewpoint container This is a fast way to create a persistent viewpoint and at the same time speed application invoke time all in one step The persistent viewpoint can
220. exercise you will again open a DVE session on the card_reader sim_vpt design viewpoint You are going to connect the pecb_design_vpt back annotation object to the simulation viewpoint in read only mode This will allow you to see PCB layout annotations in the simulation viewpoint Open the sim_vpt Design Viewpoint 1 Click the OPEN VPT icon The Open Design Sheet dialog box is displayed 2 Fill in the information shown above then click OK 6 100 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Open a Schematic View Window on card_reader 1 Click the OPEN SHEET icon Connect the pcb_design_vpt Back Annotation Object 1 10 Move any window that may be covering the Design Viewpoint window then Active the Design Viewpoint window From the popup menu choose Back Annotation gt Connect Click the Navigator button and navigate to the area underneath card_reader Select the pcb_design_vpt back annotation object then click OK Click the Read only Yes button on the form then click OK The pcb_design_vpt back annotation object is now connected to the sim_vpt viewpoint in read only mode Notice that the pcb_design_vpt back annotation object is listed as the highest priority back annotation object because the priority was set to O the default Also notice that the REF property values are now added to the blocks on the root sheet Place the mo
221. for BOLD Browser Introduction When you invoke BOLD Browser and bring up a manual only one page comes up In addition clicking the Page icons turn the pages one at a time Many people prefer to see the manual opened like a book two pages up And many people want to turn the pages two at a time like a book In this exercise you will create a startup file that will setup BOLD Browser to display and turn the pages two at a time Invoke Design Manager from a Shell 1 If you haven t already done so enter the following command in a shell MGC_HOME bin dmgr 2 Click on the Design Manager Maximize button Maximize EAn Note some window environments may have a menu choice that performs this function Make a New HOME mgc startup Directory 1 Click on the Navigator window and execute the pulldown menu Add gt Directory 2 Fill in the entry box with the pathname HOME mgc and press Return 3 Execute the pulldown menu Add gt Directory again 4 Fill in the entry box with the pathname HOME mgc startup and press Return Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 9 Customizing Exercises Invoke BOLD Browser and Open an Online Document 1 Invoke BOLD Browser from the Design Manager by double clicking the bold_browser icon bold_browser 2 Type the manual title Customizing the Common User Interface in the entry box and execute the form with a _ stroke press middle mouse button and draw a horizontal lin
222. for this function page 3 83 Copying a Code Example to a Notepad Window There are many AMPLE coding examples in the online documentation to help you customize the user interface These coding examples may be copied directly to a Notepad window then saved to the appropriate location before being loaded into an application scope There are two examples of AMPLE code on pages 3 83 and 3 84 in the AMPLE Reference Manual Practice copying this code from the BOLD Browser to a Notepad window as follows 1 With the Document window active choose menu bar Edit gt Copy Pages 2 Click on the Notepad radio button and execute the form A Notepad window comes up with the pages of text in it 3 Choose menu bar View gt Show Line Numbers 4 Select and Delete the following lines 1 to 32 9 to 16 and 28 to 41 The remaining text is two samples of ample code 5 Using the File gt Save As menu item save the code to a file named SHOME training da_n com date_function_ample 6 Close the NotePad with a horizontal stroke Travelling Back Using the Travel Log The travel log is a list of previously viewed pages and manuals Practice using the travel log by performing the following steps 1 Choose popup menu gt Travel Log gt Summary 1 82 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Follow Travel Log Most recent places travelled AMPLE Reference Manu
223. gator window The Design Manager also provides other navigation buttons to allow you to explore a design object s references enabling you to traverse the design hierarchy The illustration on the facing page shows two concepts 1 the component hierarchy and the reference pathnames and 2 references that are created by the Design Manager and those that are created by Design Architect The component hierarchy is defined by the solid arrows the reference pathnames are defined by the dashed arrows When a symbol or schematic sheet is created they are placed under the specified component Reference pathnames are automatically defined by Design Architect Thus the symbol model PROJ_A my_design my_design contains a reference to the component interface PROJ_A my_design part Notice that PROJ_A my_design part also contains a reference to the symbol PROJ_A my_design my_design The schematic model also contains a reference to PROJ_A my_design part In addition the schematic model contains a reference to the sheet PROJ_A my_design schematic sheetl and sheet contains a reference back it its parent schematic The references for sheet1 are keep in an associated file called a attr file Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 55 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Copying Design Objects e In Design Manager o Copy by containment or by reference e Resolved references are updated e Unresolved references remain uncha
224. gn Viewpoints can be created and modified with a tool called the Design Viewpoint Editor Design Architect can also invoke on a design viewpoint using the SET VIEWPOINT icon as well as a source schematic using the OPEN SHEET icon When you invoke Design Architect on a design viewpoint you may selectively merge back annotation information from the Back Annotation object onto the source schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Multiple Views of a Source Design I Simulator BA Object PA a SE 1 foro a ul i tec gt 1 Simulator a D o i 2 a ace Simulator 5G Design Viewpoint i Layout BA Object a ia j i i 145 Source Schematic o Las Layout a P Tool U il J u3 o Layout Design Viewpoint U3 U4 U1 Uui What the Layout Tool Sees What the Simulator Sees 6 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Multiple Views of a Source Design Concurrent Engineering is a design method that allows the members of a design team to work more in a parallel on the same design Although perfect concurrency is not possible it is possible to start downstream processes much sooner than ever before Tasks like simulation and physi
225. gn When you click on the CHECK REFS icon in the Design Manager palette a search for broken design references begins at that point and extends down the tree Broken references are reported in the Fix Broken References form as shown on the left You may fix a broken reference by typing the complete old pathname in the left entry box then the complete new pathname in the right entry box To save time typing you may just specify a pathname segment For example in the illustration on the left the broken reference was created by someone changing the component_lib directory name to lib You may fix this broken reference by replacing the pathname segment lib and2 with component_lib and2 The important thing to keep in mind is to make sure that the pathname segment is unique so you won t be changing similar correct pathnames from right to wrong It is a good practice to always repeat the CHECK REFS operation until the message No broken references were found is reported Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 11 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Lesson 2 Creating a Configuration and Releasing a Design Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 13 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 14 Configuration Objects Contains a set of rules that define a collection of design objects o Called a design configuration
226. gn Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 51 Creating a Schematic Schematic Editor Window Status Line 2 52 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Schematic Editor Window Status Line Now that you understand many of the basic terms and concepts of schematic capture it is appropriate to look at the Schematic Editor status line The status line appears below the menu bar and contains the following information Sel selection count tells you how many objects are currently selected means that the selection set is still open closed means that an edit operation has been performed on the set and the set is closed The sheet is either in edit mode W or read only mode w The sheet was opened in the context of a design viewpoint D or not d Opening on a viewpoint will be covered in a later module If the sheet has been opened in the context of a design viewpoint either back annotated property values are visible A or hidden a If the sheet has been opened in the context of a design viewpoint expressions are either evaluated E or not e The component leaf name the schematic name and sheet name are displayed next Active symbol information includes the leaf name of the component associated with the active symbol and the symbol name The design viewpoint name is displayed after the active symbol name All the way to the right is the current cursor location in user units The point of
227. gn Manager to Release Designs Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Lesson 1 Design References Review 8 3 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Design Object References PROJ_A my_design ra pd l Sey y PROJ_A my_design txt T A S F 4 a a oe j gt E ae eT m ry cE lq PROJ_A my_design part i tA component interface i T PROJ_A my_design my_symbol PROJ_A my_design schematic symbol schematic di y l Attribute N LEGEND poe l File Deer Component Directory Structure PB fal Reference Pathname shell mg _sheet attr PROJ_A my_design schematic sheet1 schematic sheet e Reference a pointer between two design objects e References are keep in associated attr file e You can check and modify references using Design Manager functionality 8 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Design Object References A reference is a pointer from one design object to another design object Each reference consists of the pathname to the design object its type and a version specifier References show relationships between design objects Design Architect creates references within the component You can create and modify refe
228. gt C Property Value 0 Read Only Listing Pogai belle REF Z O O INST Property Value 0 GLOBAL COMP Property Name QBRISE MODEL CLASS Property Value 0 Property Name QBFALL Property Value 0 Graphic Graphic v Nongraphic Property Name Property Value All properties will use attributes below Property Type String Stability Switch Variable Visibility Switch Number y i Fixed Visible xpression ase v Protected v Hidden Triple NonRemovable y Default For This Property Name OK Reset Cancel 3 Click the OK The dialog box disappears and the Add Property prompt bar is displayed 3 78 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 4 Position the four new property values as shown in the following figure Lj i IN schematic l as n Da Qor 0 lt QRISE gt CLK Q QFALL TAB or 2 0 lt QBRISE n Q QBFALL 5 Unselect All Change the Height of the Newly Added Property Text Change the height of the new property text as follows 1 Place the mouse pointer over each piece of new property text and tap the F1 function key This allows you to bypass the select filter and select whatever object is underneath the pointer 2 Press the Right mouse button and choose the Change Height gt 0 5 x Pin Spacing The text is reduc
229. gt Other you can specify the component name whose symbol instance may or may not be placed on the sheet and optionally an interface name in the prompt bar that is displayed The Report gt Interfaces gt Other menu item is useful when there is more than one symbol defined for a component and you are not sure of all the symbol names The information from this menu item provides the names of all symbols their registered interfaces and pin names You can view this information in a popup message window the default and or display it in the transcript the default and or store it in a file not stored by default You can change these defaults by changing the values in the Window Transcript File Mode and File entry boxes on the prompt bar for this one time only Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 29 Component Interfaces and Registration CIB Commands dff dff gt help CIB commands may be optionally terminated with a semicolon Most commands have an abbreviation listed to the right in Commands are open lt component pathname gt save forget close view help quit select_interface lt interface name gt si unselect_interface ui rename_interface lt new interface name gt ri delete _interface lt interface name gt de default_interface lt new interface name gt di salvage_interfaces sa validate_model lt model entry gt vm register_model lt model pathname gt lt
230. have the Grids Per Pin Minor Multiple and Major Multiple text entry boxes been set to Click Cancel What is the pin spacing between each Minor Multiple What is the pin spacing between each Major Multiple Add Instances to the Sheet Place instances of each component on the sheet in the center area defined by the sheet border Use the diagram at the beginning of this exercise as a guide Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Add Nets to the Sheet Add nets to the schematic in any order Try using the autoroute feature by choosing the pulldown menu Setup gt AutoRoute On When you add the wire from the middle of the ACCESS bus to the input of the and2 instance a single implicit bus ripper is Note automatically added Specify bit 8 in the popup form Modify NET Property Values Select and change the NET property values to the appropriate names If you changed the Modify Property stroke to in the last customizing exercise try using this stroke to change the values Use Sequence Text to Change the RULE Property Values 1 Zoom into the area that contains the two 8X1 bus rippers 2 Make sure everything is unselected 3 Choose the SEQUENCE TEXT icon on the schematic_text palette NAME i NAME 2 NAME 3 SEQUENCE TEXT Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 53 Additional Editing Features 4 Fill in the form as follows
231. he Active Symbol window or draw an L stroke _ in the Schematic window Replace Selected Replaces a selected instance with the active symbol Open Component Window Brings up a Component Window on the Active Symbol This window is discussed later in this module Open Active Symbol Brings up the Symbol Editor containing the symbol in read only mode Activate Selected Makes the selected instance s symbol the active symbol Hide Window Removes the Active Symbol window from the Design Architect Session window To show the Active Symbol window use the popup menu Palette gt Show Active Window or the pull down menu MGC gt Setup gt Session dialog box Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 23 Creating a Schematic Adding Nets e Nets are used to connect instance pins together The term net refers to a wire or a bus e A single net is called a wire e A grouped set of wires is called a bus Enter the add net made throu h the palette icons LIBRARY Add Wire tm appeus Add Bus WIRE BUNDLE DML in _ 5 Or use the Add Wire Stroke t and the Add Bus Stroke A You stay in the Add Net mode until you click Cancel on the prompt bar _ Click to Exit ADD WI Locations iz repeat true OK TA 2 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Adding Nets Short for network the term net refers to a wiring connection be
232. he delay symbol is used to represent a given amount of delay on a net The RISE and FALL properties are owned by the OUT pin and are set to a 0 value Moving up one level the delay symbol is instantiated on a sheet in the delay n component The values of the RISE and FALL properties are defined to be expressions TRISE and TFALL respectively The instance is enclosed by a FOR frame with an expression that expands the Frame N times when the component is evaluated by a downstream tool The port names on the sheet are defined as array elements that follow the incrementing value of J as the frame expands If N is defined to be 4 then this schematic is evaluated the same as if the circuit were included four times on the sheet Moving up one level the symbol for delay n is shown at the top of the illustration The symbol owns three body properties N TRISE and TFALL that contain values that will be used as parameters for the symbol pins and the sheet below The symbol pins are called wide pins because the names are defined in the form of a bus The names also contain an unknown value N which is defined by the N property on the symbol body The following illustration shows how the delay n component might be used In this example the delay n instance is connected to buses that are 8 bits wide The N property is set to 8 The total delay for each bus wire is specified as Sns rise and 10ns fall At evaluation time a delay instance will
233. he new symbol object 3 82 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 4 Select the component interface name my_dff Default then from the Component Information window popup menu choose Show Pin List The following figure shows the information you should see in the window ic users train1 training da my_dff Default Graphical Models b my_dff i users train1 training da_n card_reader my_dff A t default_sym j part Functional Model ie unctional Models schematic users train1 training da_n card_reader my_dff schem_id schematic gt sheet1 schematic default LJ Select Hide Show Contents Hide Models List Show Pins List Hide Body Properties ae Select be Add Components Remove Selected Components Remove All Components Edit Setup I model schematic Search qbrise 0 7 Report List Area gt Notice that the symbol model is now listed in the Registered Model Info window the symbol pins that you added to the symbol are listed in the Pins window and the symbol body properties that you added to the symbol graphics are listed in the Body Properties window 5 Close the Component Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 83 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties End of Lab Exercise This concludes
234. he schematic view stable in each viewpoint even though the design version may be slightly different At the same time the person developing the source schematic can keep working on and refining the design on the original schematics At any point in time a person working with a particular viewpoint can unlatch the viewpoint update the schematic to the most current version then re latch the viewpoint Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 7 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing Layout Changes in the Simulator Design N viewpoint gt _ Editor J Ga A erT OPEN VPT Layout Back Annotation Object ZS read only 5 Simulator g A p Back Annotation Object st ce 7 i 5 E Pi 15 P E Zi a 5 i s o T 7 4 T 10 a u3 Source a Schematic 4 i Simulator Design Viewpoint Vv Simu ator 24 bg Highest Priority Object U1 U1 connected last 15 y 10 U3 U4 What the Simulator Sees 6 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Viewing Layout Changes in the Simulator The ability to connect any Back Annotation object to any viewpoint makes it possible for design changes to be shared between tools In the illustration on the left the Layout Tool Back Annotation object created on the previous page is
235. he symbol are not on the interface QB Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface Q Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface CLR Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface PRE Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface CLK Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface D Check Pin QO errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff my_dff passed check 0 Errors 6 Warnings Z 3 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Checking the Symbol After creating a symbol body adding pins and adding properties you must check the symbol A symbol must pass certain checks before you can instantiate it on a schematic sheet The following check categories are required by Mentor Graphics applications e Symbol pin Verifies that at least one pin is present on the symbol all symbol pins have unique names and symbol property values have valid expression syntax e Symbol body Verifies the existence of symbol graphics checks expression syntax in property values and looks for duplicate property names on the symbol body objects Special symbol Verifies proper construction of a symbol that represents a special instance such as a bus ripper or offpage connector The following optional checks ma
236. he system won t descend into that block Why might you want to do this To edit an existing primitive rule in the list of primitive rules select the primitive rule you want to change then execute the Design Configuration window popup menu item Edit A dialog box appears for you to make changes To delete a primitive rule select the desired rule then execute the Delete popup menu item The primitive rule is removed from the list Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 35 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Defining Visible Properties e Defines properties to be made visible to the Design File Interface e Use the Design Configuration window popup menu Add gt Visible Property e Fill out form Add Visible Property Property Name primitive Property Owner __ Instance _ Net Case Flag NOUPCASE _ Pin x UPCASE __ Group m Viewpoint OK Reset Cancel 6 36 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Defining Visible Properties The visible property rule informs DVE which properties are to be made visible to the Design File Interface DFI and netlisters that are built on DFI Typically the visible property rule is issued three times once for each owner type Instance Pin Net followed by a list of properties model modelfile modelcode for that owner For example ADD Visi
237. his operation unlatches the design and re latches with the newest versions Filter out certain objects from being latched The filter string MGC_ in the form on the left prevents components in Mentor Graphics libraries from being latched View references and version numbers of some or all of the objects used by the design viewpoint Reporting on Latching Status You can generate a report that shows the latched versions and the most current version of every object in the design The report is generated by choosing the pulldown menu item Report gt References Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 57 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exportina a Desian Confiaquration E MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help _ Open gt ibe Setup es Close Design Viewpoint Save Design Viewpoint 1 Choose Menu Item Back Annotation z z UNSELECT SELECT Export Design Configuration ALL COUNTS ZOOM ZOOM IN OUT z VIEW VIEW 4 Design Configuration J E AREA ALL PARAMETER PRIMITIVE ER ceme OD CLOSE VPT SUBSTITUTE VISIBLE PROPERTY 4 Et net_tp_min_clearance instance LER eet bing net_tp_req instance r net pcb_group instance 7 net E balance_pair instance
238. hitect Training Workbook V8 5 2 31 Creating a Schematic Connecting and Disconnecting Net Vertices e Forces connect or disconnect of net segments and instance pins e Occurs at specified junctions and intersections e Connect All Before After e Connect Selected 2 Draw Stroke gt To OUT 5 yi g 2 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Connecting and Disconnecting Net Vertices Clicking the CONNECT ALL icon or drawing a backward C stroke top to bottom forces all net vertices marked by not dots to be connected If you select one of several not dot vertices and draw a backward C stroke bottom to top only the selected connection is forced Sometimes you need to disconnect the end of a net from a pin and move the net to a different location The procedure is to execute the popup menu item ADD gt Connections gt Disconnect Area draw the bounding box around the pin with the Select mouse button select the net vertex at the end of the net and move the vertex with a move command Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 33 Creating a Schematic Naming Nets e Net Names give each net a unique identity e Net Names establish connectivity across sheet boundaries q offpag in a O Adding Net Names 1 Select the nets you wish to name 2 Choose popup menu Name Nets Changing Net
239. hoose that the Design Manager copy the referenced objects into the copied design configuration instead of just copying the references Thus any design object referenced by the original design can optionally become part of the new design configuration However any references attached to outside objects that point to the original design remain the same that is they reference the original object and not the new copied object You need to understand the design well enough to decide whether the copied design should reference other objects like the original design or whether the copy should include the objects in the new configuration Tf you copy a schematic or sheet model within a component you must register the newly copied model within Design Architect Note You will learn more about model registration later in this training course Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 57 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Moving and Deleting Design Objects e Resolved references are updated e Unresolved references remain unchanged e References to moved deleted object outside or at the same level as the component are not updated external gt External L Reference e a e first_design y original original original first_design B a first_design C a Original Original A Reference B Reference C
240. iagram Make sure that the following information is set in the Add Pin s dialog box Name Height 50 Name Placement Name PinType lt see table below gt Use the following table as a guide to add the pins Pin Placement Pins Pintype Left RF_IN IN ADDRESS_IN IN _CLR IN _CLR IN ADDRESS_IN IN DATA_BUS 15 0 IN READ IN Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 29 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Pin Placement Pins o Pintype OSC ANALOG OSC FREQ_DET START PULSE LATCH Bottom START PULSE LATCH _CLR SERIAL_OUT _CLR ACCESS 15 0 READ RED_LED GREEN_LED Add a BLOCK_NAME Property and Value to Each Functional Block The purpose of this property is provide symbol text for the functional blocks you are creating 1 2 5 30 Click the TEXT palette button The schematic_text palette appears Select the ACCESS_CHK rectangle Make sure that this is the only object selected The select count should be 1 Click the ADD PROPERTY icon Fill in the following information Property Name BLOCK_NAME Property Value ACCESS_CHK Property Type String Click OK Position the ACCESS_CHK text inside the rectangle and click the Select mouse button then Unselect All 4 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 6 Select the FREQ_DET rectangle and click the ADD PROPERTY icon 7 Perform the following when the Add Property di
241. ic In this lab exercise you will modify properties on the my_dff schematic sheet that you created in the previous module Open the my_dff Schematic 1 Click on the DA Session Window so that the Session palette appears 2 Open a Schematic window on the my_dff component 3 Maximize the Schematic Window 4 Draw the stroke to view the entire sheet The schematic should look like the following PRE CLK CLR 3 70 0 0 CLR 0 EN Q 0 D Q lo 0 SET 0 SET IO EN a QB 0 0 0 CLR oo Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Change the Values of the Rise and Fall Properties Notice that the current values of the Rise and Fall properties on the inv output instances are set to 0 In this exercise you will change them to the expressions QRISE and QFALL for the top output inverter QBRISE and QBFALL for the bottom output inverter Use the following method to change the property values 1 Set the selection filter to Properties only and with the Select mouse button draw a bounding box around the Rise and Fall properties of the output inv instances The four Os should be highlighted and the select count should be 4 2 Click the palette button then click the CHANGE VALUE icon ah CHANGE VALUE 3 Fill in the prompt bar as follows CHA PR V B H New Value QRISE
242. ic2 hi_speed Selected Hide Models List V Model Show Labels ee EEEMERES Select my_att STRAIN Eo E A D Unregister a CLK Search Validate Models eS PRE CLR Report Add Labels QB 7 Delete Labels K qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 N model schematic qfall 0 i aS 7 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Unregister Models The component window also allows you to unregister models from a component interface In the illustration on the left page the functional model schematic is being removed from the model table in the component interface Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 19 Component Interfaces and Registration Creating More than One Symbol Open Symbol Component Name HOME training da_n card_reader my_dff Navigator Pathname for Symbol Specific Startup Script File Path Options NO YES Specify New Symbol Name Open as A Edi x Read Only OK Reset Cancel 7 20 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Creating More than One Symbol Sometimes it is desirable to have more than one symbol for a particular component In the Mentor Graphics libraries each component has an MG_STD symbol and ANSI symbol and
243. in the design tree it may be a property defined in the design viewpoint parameter rule or it may be defined through an associated technology file You must define parameters for all variables in the design prior to the time the design is evaluated As each design object is evaluated unresolved variables cause the system to search up through the design tree If a match is found the value is substituted and the expression is resolved to a constant If no match found the parameter rule in the design viewpoint is checked then the associated technology file is checked if one exists If the value for a variable is not found an error occurs and an error message is issued Parameters defined in the viewpoint configuration rule are called global parameters because they can be seen by the entire hierarchical design The figure on the left shows how the global parameter X is defined in the viewpoint configuration rule If a value X is specified in a design expression and the property X is not defined elsewhere higher in the design hierarchy then the number 10 which is defined for X in the viewpoint is substituted for X when the expression is evaluated The exact search rule for parameters is defined on the next page Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 31 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Search Path for Parameters Comp Interface No Design
244. ing a Symbol and Adding Properties Setting the Symbol Body Defaults When you create symbol graphics and text default values are used for line style line width polygon fill and text attributes such as font style text height justification and orientation You can change these defaults by choosing Setup gt Symbol Body or the Setup Graphics icon changes only the symbol graphics The next time you create a symbol graphic or add symbol text the default values that you specified are displayed Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 13 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Adding Pins e Electrical connection between symbol body and net e Use the popup menu or the palette icon S gt ADD PIN ADD Pins s Name Height 75 50 0 75 on 1 0 Pin Grid Name Placement Manual Name lt Name Pin Type IN OUT XO omit Pin Placement S g Lo Pin Names s OK Reset Cancel 3 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Adding Pins A symbol is an abstract representation of an associated functional model like a schematic A symbol pin on a symbol is an electrical connection that represents an external port on the functional model underneath There must be a one to one match between symbol pins and the ports on the functional model That is the pin name must match the port name
245. interface Q Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface CLR Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface PRE Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface CLK Warning The following pins on the symbol are not on the interface D Check Pin 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff my_dff passed check 0 Errors 6 Warnings K S Notice that the Check Status window displays several warnings These warnings are always given when pins are changed or added to a symbol They are normal when saving a symbol for the first time because the pins list in the component interface is changed from zero pins to a number matching the new pins on the symbol 3 68 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties a If your check results in errors you can identify handle names like I 3 by clicking the handle name in the Check Status window The object associated with that handle name is selected on the sheet b Close the Check Status window The symbol window is automatically reactivated Save the Symbol 1 Choose the following menu item File gt Save Symbol Iconify the Symbol Window 1 Iconify the Symbol Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 69 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Exercise 2 Adding Properties to a Schemat
246. ion 2 Version 2 Version 1 Version 1 Version 1 gt Version 1 Version 1 Version 1 Object A ObjectB ObjectC Object A ObjectB ObjectC Second Release First ae Release a Revision a Version2 Version 2 z o Version 1 Version 1 Version 1 a ee A Pa JZ C Revision 1 J J Creates a protected copy Releases a single version of each design object Release Configuration command assigns the release attribute to every versioned design object Extracted copies of designs can be opened for further editing without harming released design 8 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Releasing Designs Releasing a configuration creates a protected copy of its entries In other words the Design Manager will not allow you to create new versions of the released design objects A copy becomes protected when the Release Configuration command assigns the released attribute to every versioned object in the release directory Releasing a configuration releases a single version of each design object The first time that you release design objects to the destination directory all versioned design objects are rolled to version 1 In subsequent releases to the same destination directory new versions are layered on top of the existing versions creating a version history of the released configuration The illustration on the facing page shows an example of creating multiple revis
247. ion area and executing the pulldown menu MGC gt Location Map gt Set Working Directory OK the form Save the New File as session_area ample You are going to save the new set_working_directory function in a scope common to all applications Do the following Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 15 Customizing Exercises 5 Close the Define Userware window with a gt stroke Answer Yes to the Query form Type the pathname HOME mgc userware base session_area ample in the entry box and press Return If a message appears stating that the pathname doesn t exist you probably haven t yet created a base directory under userware Do the following In any window type system mkdir HOME mgc userware base and press Return This system function issues the make directory command to the shell from which the application was invoked The shell executes the command and creates the base directory Repeat steps through 3 to save the file This new Set Working Directory form will now appear in every application from which you call it A 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Exercise 4 Customizing the Modify Property Stroke Introduction Using strokes is an effective method to speed the task of creating and modifying a schematic A stroke that you will want to use often is the Modify Property stroke With this stroke you can click on a property value
248. ion was made _ Are displayed when a net crosses a pin or vertex during an edit operation e Example Before move o After move 2 30 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Net Connection Rules During net creation connections are created at input points with pins net vertices or segments However edit commands such as Move Copy Flip Delete Rotate and Pivot do not automatically make new connections Instead they preserve the connectivity that was established before the edit operation If a net passes over any existing pins or vertices no connections are made at those vertices This can result in cases where nets may look connected but are not To enable you to see where a net connection has not been made these locations are marked with a non electrical graphical object called a not dot A not dot on a vertex indicates that not all segments passing through the vertex are connected It can be plotted but cannot be removed without changing the graphics or connecting the overlapping vertices using one of the Connect commands discussed on the next page In the example on the facing page an instance of an inv symbol and an instance of an and2 symbol are connected by a net The inv instance is selected and moved so that the attached net touches the second pin vertex of the and2 instance A not dot appears to indicate that there is no electrical connection made at that point Design Arc
249. ions of a design by releasing a configuration multiple times In this example the design consists of objects A B and C Before the first release you have several versions of each design object and a configuration that contains the current version of each object When you release the configuration you attach the annotation Revision 1 to the release If you modify the design and create version 3 and 4 of objects A and B respectively without changing C you can release the design again this time attaching the annotation Revision 2 to the release This release adds version 2 to released object A and version 2 to released object B Because object C has not changed since the last release its version number is not incremented When you have released a configuration such as Revision 1 of the design that version remains intact However you can extract another copy of the configuration such as Revision 2 in which you can open and edit design objects without damaging the released design Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 23 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Lab Exercises Objectives In these lab exercises you will do the following 1 Create a reference from the card_reader design to a document called card_reader rel_notes using the Design Manager 2 View the contents of the card_reader design and the references
250. it because all relative pathnames that you enter will be considered relative to the setting of the current working directory You open an existing Design Viewpoint or create a new one by clicking the OPEN VPT icon as shown on the left Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 19 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Opening a Design Viewpoint Open Design Viewpoint Component Name users jdesigner training da_n card_reader Navigator Open as gt Editable Viewpoint Name default Read Only Options NO YES Root Type References li la interface Root Name Current symbol Last Used Version Preset Global Parameters NO YES Name Value String Number Expression Triplet OO Ok Reset Cancel 6 20 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Opening a Design Viewpoint The Open Design Viewpoint form is shown on the left You must specify the following entries Component Name The pathname for the component representing you design Viewpoint Name The name default is entered by default If you are creating a new viewpoint the new viewpoint name will be default unless you backspace over this name and enter a different name Open as You can open an existing viewpoint as Editable or Read Only You may optionally specify the following Root Type Informa
251. item in the Softkey menu or the Setup gt Hide Softkeys menu from the pulldown menu bar To show the softkey area you access the Setup gt Show Softkeys menu item from the pulldown menu bar Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 23 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Command Window Pops up when you start typing Z system mkdir HOME mgc userware des_arch session CTRLP e Returns the previous entry to the window CTRLN lt Moves forward in the History List and returns that entry CRTLH lt Displays a complete History List Select the entry you want Command History system mkdir HOME mgc userware base system mkdir HOME mgc userware set_working_directory lt L OK Cancel Back ALT Space Returns the previous entry to the window Pre V8 4 Behavior 1 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Command Window When you start typing in a window the command window automatically pops up with your entry You may enter commands or functions in this fashion The name of the active window is shown on the left side of the Command window and the command or function you type must be defined within a scope that is visible to this window A history list is keep for this window With the Command window displayed type Ctr
252. ity and is the active back annotation object meaning that it will receive any new changes made to the design In the illustration the default back annotation object has been selected in the window and the popup menu Back Annotation gt Disconnect has been chosen A form will appear to verify the pathname of the selected back annotation object In this case when the form is executed the default back annotation object will be disconnected and the pcb_design_vpt back annotation will become the highest priority back annotation object Since this object was originally connected in read only mode no changes will be written to it In a similar manner if you choose the popup menu item Back Annotation gt Connect a form comes up where you can specify the pathname of a back annotation object you which to connect to the viewpoint Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 41 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Other Tasks that may be done with DVE 6 42 Automatically setup for a downstream application View schematic sheets and VHDL models Add modify and delete back annotated property values Import and Export ASCII back annotation files Perform a design wide check Latch a viewpoint Report on design objects Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Other Tasks that may be done with DVE You can perform the following tasks in DVE as well as in othe
253. jects that you can report on Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 39 Additional Editing Features A Report Window Example Text Attribute Instance Name I 2 SMGC_GENLIB inv inv flipped vertically I 2 SMGC_GENLIB inv inv Net NS 3 Net Name Reporting Instance Net Pin Property Location Version 1 00 3 50 2 150 0 25 1 Vertex Location Attached Vertices Vertex Pins Name Of VS67 2 75 0 lt 25 VS 191 PS66 OUT V 17 1 00 0 25 V 191 PS16 IN VS67 1 75 0 25 VS67 V 17 V 193 V 193 1 75 3 50 VSL91 VS43 eal 4 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features A Report Window Example The example on the facing page is the result of a Report gt Object gt As Specified menu item on selected instances nets pins properties and text attributes Note that the top of the report window indicates the type of objects that were specified in the Report Object dialog box Information on instances includes handle name full pathname location on sheet and orientation Information on nets includes handle name net name vertex handle names locations of vertex handles attached vertices handle names vertex pin handle names pin names and location of pins Selecting a handle in a report window causes the corresponding objected to be selected in the corresponding schematic or symbol window De
254. ker and double clicking that the other end After the first line is drawn use the copy stroke to create and place the other two lines Perform this action for as many times as there are whiskers Make sure that you end each line on a pin grid Pins will be attached to the end of these lines and pins must snap to these grid points Draw the gt polyline by clicking once at the starting point once at the tip and twice at the end Unselect All with a 4 stroke Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Add Pins to the Symbol Body 1 Click on the ADD PIN icon oe 2 Fill in the following dialog box as shown ADD Pins s Name Height 75 50 0 75 on 1 0 Pin Grid Name Placement Manual Name ol Name Pin Type IN OUT xo omit Pin Placement o4 aie Pin Names s D CLK OK Reset Cancel Make sure you click the Manual button 3 Click OK or press RETURN The dialog box disappears and the Add Pin prompt bar is displayed as shown below ADD PI Next Pinto Place D Location Info left F Pin Location Text Location OK Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 63 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 4 Move the cursor to the desired location of the pin at the end of the line as shown below and click the Select mouse butto
255. ks y Working with Design Viewpoints Component Interfaces and Registration y Using Design Manager to Release Designs 3 2
256. l P for previous to bring the last entry back into the window type Ctrl N to move forward in the history list and type Ctrl H to bring up a form with all the entries listed Select one and click OK For software versions prior to V8 4 type Alt BackSpace to bring back the previous entry Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 25 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Prompt Bars Text Entry Box Location Cursor Next Pinto Place D Location Info left l Pin Location Text Location OK Cancel ADD PI Command Name Stepper Button Mid Command Freedom edit_source function_name OK Cancel cel ion El Text Location OK Cancel Lets you execute an additional function before you complete the previous one 1 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Prompt Bars A prompt bar is a graphic aid that is displayed when you need to supply additional information to a command When the prompt bar is displayed you supply the additional information by typing in text or clicking a stepper button Sometimes you must supply a coordinate location by clicking on a point in a window When you have supplied all the necessary information the prompt bar goes away Sometimes you execute a function like ADD WIRE in the Design Architect Schematic Editor and the prompt ba
257. lly I 2 SMGC_GENLIB inv inv 1 50 0 25 1 Net NS3 Net Name Vertex Location Attached Vertices Vertex Pins Name Of VS67 2 75 0 25 VS191 PS66 OUT vV 17 1 00 0 25 V 191 P 16 IN VS67 1 75 0 25 VS67 VS17 V 193 VS193 1 lt 75 3 50 VSi9l VS43 H A 3 Scroll to the right of the report window if you need to view the entire contents 4 Close the report window Close the add_convert Schematic Window Close the add_convert Schematic window as you have done in previous exercises 4 58 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Exercise 2 Browsing the add_convert Component in the Component Hierarchy Window It is helpful to keep track of the hierarchical structure of your design The following exercise will instruct you on how to view the hierarchy of you newly created add_convert design in the Component Hierarchy Window 1 Activate the DA Session window by clicking on it 2 Click on the HIERARCHY WINDOW palette icon ARCHY WINDOW 3 Select the add_convert component in the Navigator Window and click OK Current Component training da_n card_reader add_convert add_convert schm schematic rip primitive ground primitive m 74259 primitive vec primitive res alt primitive portin primitive m inv primitive m and2 primitive portout primitive 74ls161
258. m a hae PARAM pain J Bana CONNECT BA eE D ER w ARCHY COMP WINDOW WINDOW Setup Palette B3 SAVE DESIGN V F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Unselect A Open Dvpt Popup Me Report Ob Add Prope Open Shee Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Close Dvpt Change Pr Open Sele Read File Close Win Reopen Se Save Dvpt Reslect Check Des Delete Pro Open Up Open Dow A e 6 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Default Window Arrangement The default windows for DVE are shown on the left are described as follows Design Viewpoint Window This is the main control window for the viewpoint which is named in the title area When back annotation objects are opened and or connected to the viewpoint they are listed in this window Design Configuration Window This window shows the configuration rules that are defined for the viewpoint In the illustration on the left the viewpoint is new and the rules are undefined so there is no information displayed other than the title blocks for the rules e Setup Palette This palette contains icons that you will use to define the configuration rules for the opened viewpoint Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 23 Working with Design Viewpoin
259. mand Window Prompt Bars Strokes Quick Help on Strokes Transcript Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 xviii 1 6 1 8 1 10 1 15 1 16 1 18 1 20 1 22 1 24 1 26 1 28 1 30 1 32 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Session Setup 34 Lesson 3 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files 1 37 Editing Files with Notepad 38 Lesson 4 Viewing and Searching Online Documentation____ 1 41 Online Help 4 Opening Online Documents Il 4 Searching and Traveling in Documents ___ _ SSS S S CSsSSC CSSCSs I 46 Lesson 5 Using Design Manager to Copy Objects____ AOD Copying Objects in the Navigator Window ____ SSS 5 Soft Prefixes and Location Maps 5 Design Object References 54 Copying Design Objects 516 Moving and Deleting Design Objects 1 58 Checking and Changing Design References ___SCSCSCSSS 1 60 Lab Exercises_____ 63 Installing the Training Data SSS 63 Print Out the Lab Exercises____ 653 Exercise 1 Copying the Training Data SSC CNWC dL 64 Exercise 2 Using Notepad to Create and Modify ASCII Files_____ 1 71 Exercise 3 Viewing and Searching Online Documents______ s d 77 Module 2 Creating a Schematic__ 2 1 Module 2 Overview _ 2 2 Lesson Creating a Schematic__ __ SSS 2 3 Invoking Design Architect 4 Opening a Schematic Sheet__ gt 2 6 The Schematic Editor Window _ 2 8 Elements of a Sch
260. mands and functions On Keys Provides help on predefined keys or a table of logical function key name mappings On Menus Provides help on the types of menus and the contents of each Design Architect menu On Palettes Provides a description of the Design Architect palette menus On Strokes Provides a dialog box on strokes for the active window Open Tutorial Brings up a BOLD Browser window that displays the Getting Started with Design Architect Training Workbook Open Procedure Brings up a BOLD Browser window that displays the Operating Procedures section of the Design Architect User s Manual Open Index Brings up a BOLD Browser window that contains the index of the Design Architect User s Manual Open Bookcase Brings up a BOLD Browser window that contains the list of documents that compose the Design Creation documentation set More Help Information on properties short cuts customer support release notes documentation roadmap on help and current version Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 43 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Opening Online Documents BOLD Browser WO MGC File Search Setup Help Open Document from Bookcase Double Click on Bookcase System defined Bookcases Falcon Framework A AMPLE Reference Manual l S Manual P i oard Flow Sequencer Manua 7 BOLD Adrintenaior User s Reference Manual Double Click BOLD Browser Reference
261. matic Valid for property Valid for interface my_dff STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 of type mgc_schematic Valid for property Valid for interface my_dff Validated 2 model s S 7 K E 7 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Validating Models The information in the component interface table about symbol pins symbol pin properties and body properties is take from a symbol when the symbol is registered with the component interface When a functional model is registered with the component interface a software routine is run to check if the ports on the functional model match the registered pins in the interface A few other checks are also made If the ports match the pins the model is marked Valid If a mismatch is found the model is marked Not Valid Normally when a schematic is saved and registered to a component interface the validation routine is run to check if the model is valid If functional models are registered and a symbol is re saved and registered to the interface the already registered functional models are marked Not Valid at that time because it is unknown whether the ports still match the pin list in the interface table The validation routine can be run on schematics marked Not Valid by opening the schematic in the Schematic Editor and re saving the sheet In addition to running the validation routine this i
262. matic The symbol does not show up because you haven t created it yet 2 74 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic 8 Also notice the name of the Component Interface table is my_dff and that it is marked as the Default interface Double click on the word schematic to list the content underneath Select the name my_dff Default as shown below c users train1 training da _ q Defa part gt 1 schematic i schem_id gt sheet1 The content of the Model Info window is displayed Place the cursor in the Component Information window press the Right mouse button and select Show Pins List Why are there no pins displayed in the Pins window Close the Component Window End of Lab Exercises This concludes the lab exercises for this module If you have time turn to Exercise 2 in Appendix A Customizing Exercises and learn how to create a startup file for the Design Architect Session Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 75 Creating a Schematic 2 76 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 3 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Lesson 1 Creating a Symbol Lesson 2 Adding Properties Lab Exercises Creating a Symbol Adding Properties to a Schematic Adding Properties to a Symbol Browsing the my_dff Component in the Component Window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 3 3 23 3 59 3 60 3 70
263. mes Checks frame overlap frame expression instance or pin overlap Symbol Pins Checks for the existence of symbol pins on the sheet If you set the required checks to Nocheck when the schematic sheet is evaluated in the downstream applications the application will issue a warning that the sheet did not pass the required checks Optional Sheet Checks Parameters Checks for parameter evaluation Expressions Checks for expression evaluation Owner Checks to make sure that all properties have the right owners Overlaps Checks for bounding box instance overlaps Notdots Checks for not dot existence on sheet Closedots Checks existence of visual dot vertices on net connections Dangles Checks for existence of unconnected nets and unconnected pins INIT Props Annotations Checks for annotations on fixed or protected properties Userrules Checks user defined checks User Defined Sheet Checks You can specify a user defined macro file written in AMPLE that contains your own checks and specify the pathname to the file that contains your user defined checks You can also change how the check results are displayed or stored Check results are generally displayed in a check status window placed in a transcript but not stored in a file You can change the values of these items by clicking the appropriate button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 43 Additional Editing Features Setting Check Levels for Schematics Ch
264. mine which model is chosen for a particular instance e MODELFILE Specifies one or more pathnames of text files containing programmable logic device memory or analog device information Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 41 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common Analog Simulation Properties e The analog properties used depend on the type of analog device e The following are common analog properties for a resistor P X PINTYPE INSTPAR 3 42 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Common Analog Simulation Properties The analog specific properties attached to a particular analog device depend on the type of device and the simulator being used In total there are more than thirty different analog specific properties that may be assigned The illustration to the left shows typical analog properties assigned to a resistor The properties are defined as follows MODEL Used in conjunction with the ELEMENT property to identify the functional description to be used for analog simulation ELEMENT Specifies a built in instance type that is recognized by the analog simulator This property is used in conjunction with the MODEL property to identify the functional description to be used for analog simulation COMP Provides a unique name usually to identify a specific manufacturer s component INSTPAR Used to specify analog device parameters
265. n ss oee o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o a O E fa ae re a CLK Text Here The location cursor moves to the Text Location text entry box You will see text D appear near the pin location 5 Move the cursor to the desired location of the text as shown above and click the Select mouse button A diamond shaped object representing a pin is placed at the end of the line The Pin Name D is positioned to the right of the pin and the PINTYPE property value IN is displayed The prompt bar disappears and another Add Pin prompt bar is displayed The Next Pin to Place entry box is filled in with CLK The Location Info entry box is filled in with left The location cursor is on the Pin Location prompt text 6 Move the cursor to the desired location of the pin at the end of the line as shown above and click the Select mouse button The location cursor moves to the Text Location entry box You will see text CLK appear near the pin location 7 Move the cursor to the desired location of the text as shown above then click the Select mouse button 3 64 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties A diamond shaped object representing a pin is placed at the end of the line The Pin Name CLK is positioned to the right of the pin and the Pintype property value IN is displayed 8 Contin
266. n gt Save As 2 Type the following information in the prompt bar Path your_path training da_n_config 3 View the your_path training directory to verify that the configuration object da_n_config exists Copy the Design Configuration to Another Directory 1 Activate the configuration window and choose the following menu item 8 32 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Configuration gt Global Operations gt Copy You will see the following message in the message area The configuration is not locked A Copy Configuration dialog box is displayed 2 Type in the following information Destination Directory your_path training da_n_copy Overwrite Mode Cancel Preview Only No 3 Click OK A message window is displayed with the following information Create destination directory lt your_path gt training da_n_copy 4 Click Yes The configuration window displays the status of the configuration copy When it is completed the following information is displayed in the message area The Copy operation succeeded View the Contents of the da_n_copy Directory Explore the contents of the your_path training da_n_copy directory using the navigator buttons Verify that the references in da_n_copy for card_reader add_convert and my_dff are correct End of Lab Exercise Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 33 Using Design Manager to Release Designs 8 34 Design Architect
267. n Data Model EDDM When you use the editors in Design Architect to enter a design a set of design files and directories is created called the Electronic Design Data Model EDDM Typically the basic building blocks of your design will be pre built components that reside in libraries located somewhere in your file system Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Component Structure Conceptual View Model Table Body Property Lis Schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Simple Component Structure Conceptual View The basic unit structure of the EDDM is called a component In other systems this unit structure might be called a cell A component can be thought of as a sphere containing a collection of models that represent a chunk of electronics The simple structure illustrated on the facing page shows a component that models an S R latch The component contains a graphical model called a symbol and a functional model in the form of a schematic The control center of the component is called the component interface and may be thought of as the nucleus of the cell Graphical Model symbol Composed of symbol body graphics symbol pins and properties A component may have more than one
268. n Viewpoints and Back Annotation 1 Activate the card_reader root Schematic Window then from the popup menu choose Select gt By Property Select By Property Property Type Property Name model ce A String Number Property Value inv a v Regular Exp Select Other Types m Instances Monitor_Flag fe colt o ea Nets Bus Design_Viewpoint Design_Configuration Back_Annotation OK Reset Cancel __ Pins 2 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK Notice that the inverter instances on every sheet in the design are selected 3 From the popup menu choose Select gt Connected gt Pins The inv instance pins as well as the inv instance bodies are now selected Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 91 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 4 From the popup menu choose Change gt property Change Property Unable to display values because multiple objects are selected Jalal Lie x INEM Existing Property Name be used unless new property ae name is filled in below Click Other Property Name Add New Property Value linv_rise PORY Type Change on selected objects Yes No _ Verify Expression BA Name training da_n card_reader sim_vpt OK Reset Cancel Triplet 5 Fill out th
269. n your design You can examine the sheet that caused an error or warning by selecting the instance pathname in the Check Design window then use the Open Selected command Once you know which sheet caused the error you can open Design Architect in another shell make the necessary changes to the sheets that contain errors and warnings then check and save the component You may also have errors and warnings that can be fixed by adjusting the design configuration rules or back annotations in DVE To re check the design in DVE use the Edit gt Reload Model pulldown menu item specifying that all or specific models should be reloaded This causes the specified models to be reloaded into memory from disk Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 55 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Latching a Viewpoint f MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help users jdesigner my_design default_1 E DESIGN CONFIGURATION Design Viewpoint M Open Close Design Viewpoint Save Design Viewpoint Back Annotation STS Oa 2 Latch Version Select Unlatch Version A Unselect Update Version Latch Version ALL SUB TREE COMPONENT BA Latch everthing referenced by viewpoint Do not latch anything whose pathname includes filter string Filter MGC_ Filter
270. ncrements the version number The other way to revalidate a functional model is shown on the facing page You can open a component window select the models to be validated then choose the Edit gt Validate Models menu item Some downstream tools will not invoke properly on models marked Not Valid while other tools don t care about the validation status If you receive a model not valid warning message it is always best to revalidate the model before invoking a downstream tool on it Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 25 Component Interfaces and Registration Multiple Component Interfaces 3 A IKa STRAINING da_n my_df my_dff Graphical Models ANSI Default TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff ANSI N default_sym ANBI p my_dff Functional Models part TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic pL pa schematic schematic schematic ___ _ schem_id default L gt sheet gt TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 schematic2 schematic2 schematic2 i schem_id __ sheet LJ 1 2nd Interface Table Created Pins A D CLK a qfall 0 qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 model schematic f i H E a 7 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Multiple Component Interfaces Sometimes it is desir
271. nctions in des_arch da_session ample get loaded into the da_session scope New function definitions are added and functions by the same name as default functions are overloaded replaced When the Schematic Editor is invoked within DA the functions in des_arch schematic ample get loaded into the schematic scope AMPLE functions in the userware directory are loaded into the scopes but they are not executed If you want to execute AMPLE functions upon invocation the functions must be placed in a startup file under the startup directory as shown in the illustration Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 3 Customizing Exercises A 4 Command Window Pops up when you start typing gt ra gt session system mkdir HOME mgc userware des_arch CTRLP e _ Returns the previous entry to the window CTRLN Moves forward in the History List and returns that entry CRILH e Displays a complete History List Select the entry you want Command History system mkdir HOME mgc userware base system mkdir HOME mgc userware set_working_directory lt Dl OK Cancel ALT Back Space _ Returns the previous entry to the window Pre V8 4 Behavior Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Command Window When you start typing in a window the command window automati
272. nd ANALOG blocks in the Schematic View window Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 87 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Click the EDIT button on the palette then click the ADD PROPERTY icon Add Property Existing Property Name block be used unless new property model Highlighted property name will name is filled in below New Property Name primitive lt 1 Enter Property Value empty_block a Property Type String z Number v Expression y Triplet Add to selected objects Yes No BA Name training da_n card_reader sim_vpt _ 2 Click oK Reset Cancel 6 88 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK The system pops a form telling you that a back annotation object has not yet been created and asks if you want to create attach one Verify yes then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation The primitive properties are added in red to the selected instances through the back annotation object as shown in the following illustration a sheet1 Ee ADDRESS_IN FREQ CLR ACCESS _CHK RED LED DATA_BUS 15 0 5 J wad GREEN _LED SERIAL_OUT CLR ADDAESS_IN ADD_CONVERT Back Annotated schematic Properties in Red Check the Design Again 1 Check
273. nd replace E copy text move text delete text and undo the last action 5 Repeat the search by choosing Menu Bar Search gt Search Again gt Forward 6 Notepad highlights the word text after to the word copy This is a practice Notepad Editor session Within this practice sessio you will search for and replace text copy text move text delete text and undo the last action 7 Unselect the string text by drawing a U stroke 4 Searching for and Replacing a String 1 Go back to the top of the file by pressing Ctrl T 2 Display the Search and Replace dialog box by choosing Menu Bar Search gt Replace Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 73 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 3 Search for the word action and replace it with procedure by filling out the form as follows a Click OK The word action is highlighted in the Notepad window A Replace dialog box asks you to confirm the replace operation b Click Yes Notepad replaces the string action with the string procedure The message window informs you that one occurrence of action was found and replaced 4 Remove the highlighting by drawing a U stroke 4 5 Move to the top of the file by pressing Ctrl T 1 74 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Practice Copying Moving and Deleting Text
274. nding palette The new palette replaces the existing one Common Palette Buttons The middle area of each palette contains a common area of buttons that perform the same function on each palette Many of these functions can also be found in the session popup menu Palette Icons These buttons form a subset of the total icons available and are grouped on a palette according to function For example the palette on the left contains icons that allow you to add instances to a schematic sheet and route nets between the instance pins Palette selections work much the same as menu choices that is you may be prompted for additional information in a dialog box or a prompt bar In addition palette buttons may be grayed to indicate that the choice cannot be made Some buttons may require design objects to be selected before they become available while other buttons require that a type of window be present Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 21 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Softkeys e Indicate the operation of each function key e They change from window to window e They do not function as buttons only visual von FO F1 F2 F3 F4 Pulldown Menu Select Area Any Unselect All Add Wire Popup Menu l Select Vertex Unselect Area Add Bus Bundle Reopen Sheet Move Copy Reselect F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 Place Symbol Set Grid Snap Sel Txt amp Move View Area Reselect s Add Property Con
275. ndow now displays schematic2 Close the Viewpoint 1 Click on the CLOSE VPT icon 2 Click YES on the Save Viewpoint query form All the windows in the DVE Session should close Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 39 Component Interfaces and Registration Exercise 3 Creating a Second add_convert Component Interface In this lab exercise you will create a new add_convert schematic by adding portin and portout instances to the TEST and PARITY nets respectively You will save the new schematic to a new component interface called add_convert_test You will then create a new add_convert_test symbol with additional TEST and PARITY pins then save the symbol to the add_convert_test component interface Next you will open a Schematic window on card_reader and Replace the add_convert instance with add_convert_test FInally you will open DVE on the sim_vpt viewpoint unlatch the card_reader component reload all models then relatch the viewpoint Create an add_convert_test Schematic with TEST and PARITY Ports 1 Bring a DA Session window back up and Open a Schematic Window on the add_convert component 2 Add a portin instance to the TEST net and a portout instance to the PARITY net 3 Check the sheet 7 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration 4 Save the sheet using the pulldown menu File gt Save Sheet As Save Sheet As Component Name training da_n card
276. nect All Chg Text Value View All C Check Sheet Open Up Open Down 1 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Softkeys Softkeys are not buttons like the ones you see in a palette Instead the softkey area is presented to give you a visual representation of the function keys To execute a softkey action you look up the action you want to perform in the softkey area and then press the appropriate function key combination There are four key combinations for each function key Function key alone Several common user interface operations such as Pulldown menu and Popup menu are reserved for this mode Press the function key by itself Shifted function key The second row of operations which are in line with s in the key are executed by first pressing and holding the shift key while pressing the function key The View All function F8 is accessed this way Control function key The third row of operations which are in line with c in the key are executed by pressing and holding the Control Ctrl key while pressing the function key For example this is how you access the Move command F2 6699 Alt function key The last row of operations which are in line with a in the key are executed holding the Alt key while pressing the function key To remove the softkey area use the Hide Softkeys menu
277. necting a single wire change Rule property value to a single bit number e Connecting multiple wires change Rule property value to specify each bit separated by commas DATA_BUS 1 0 IO_BUS 0 4 CONTROL_BUS 127 125 4 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Defining the Rule Property You must change each Rule property value on a ripper pin to a unique value This identifies what line or lines of the source bus are connected to an attached net If you want to use the bus ripper to extract just one wire you must change the value of the Rule property to the bit position on the bus to be extracted If you want to use the bus ripper to extract several wires you must change the value of the Rule property to match all the bits that you are extracting as shown in the left by the value 4 0 1 The wire on the left 4 is considered the most significant bit The example on the facing page shows that five wires PRE CLK Q QB and CLR are connected to a bus called IO_BUS 0 4 The bus is defined by the NET property attached to the net vertex at the bottom left corner Three control lines are ripped from the IO_BUS and connected to a sub bus called CONTROL_BUS 127 125 wire 4 the CLR wire is connected to CONTROL_BUS 127 wire 0 the PRE wire is connected to CONTROL_BUS 126 wire the CLK wire is connected to CONTROL_BUS 125 The QB and Q wires are connected to DATA_BUS 1 and D
278. nection is possible but won t be made without an explicit command from you 4 Make the connection by drawing a connect all stroke _ Notice that the not dot disappears and a junction dot gy takes its place 5 With the inv instance still selected draw a D stroke to delete it The instance and the not dot disappear from the sheet 2 70 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Exercise 3 Changing the Mouse Selection Filter There is a selection filter attached to the mouse that controls what can be selected by pointing and clicking Property text is not selectable with this filter set to default values Verify this by clicking on some property text The Selection Filter is only associate with the mouse When you move the mouse cursor over property text and press the F1 Select function key the text is selected This key allows you to quickly bypass the filter at times when you need to The following procedure will show you how to set and use the selection filter to select hard to reach objects In this procedure you will set the filter to select only net vertices You will select two vertices and move the net segment between then reset the filter 1 Activate the Schematic Window and draw a stroke The Select Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below Setup Select Filter Add Route Text Draw Selection Filter will allow selection of Comments _
279. nes a unique name for the Instance CLASS Symbol Body Instance Body The value defines a Special Connection GLOBAL Symbol Body The value defines a design wide net name FREXP 3 34 Frame The value defines the FRAME expression Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties SLD Properties Structured Logic Design SLD properties are special properties built into Design Architect They pass object identity and connectivity information about the design to the Design Viewpoint Editor DVE and downstream applications SLD properties are unique in that SLD property values cannot be modified in downstream applications SLD properties have default property owners The list below briefly describes these properties NET Design Architect automatically assigns a name of the form N to each net This property specifies horizontal connectivity by assigning unique names to wires buses ports and offpage connectors If a NET property and or value is assigned to a Symbol Pin and an owner of pin and net is specified the NET property and value are transferred to the instance pin vertex when the symbol is instantiated PIN Specifies a unique name for a logical pin on a symbol RULE Specifies which wires are diverted from a bus to an output pin on a bus ripper component INST Design Architect automatically assigns a handle name like I 2 to each instance The
280. nets and instance pins as the files The root level of the design is referenced by a slash By following a path that starts at the root level of the design you can find any instance net or instance pin For example in the figure on the facing page the pathname I 1 I 3 OUT is the pathname to an instance pin named OUT on an instance I 3 I 3 is an instance on a schematic whose parent instance I 1 lives on the sheet at the root level In the figure on the left all the nets on the lower schematic have I 1 on the root sheet as a parent instance So for example the pathname I 1 N 245 refers to a net with the handle N 245 on the lower sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 49 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotation Window MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help users jdesigner my_design default_1 nm DESIGN CONFIGURATION 1 BACK ANNOTATION default 2 BACK ANNOTATION pcb des N Design Viewpoint Open Close Design Viewpoint Design Configuration Back Annotation Save Design Viewpoint Back Annotation Latch Version Select 5 Unselect Sheet Selecteg 4 users jdesigner my_design default_2 J El Edit Instance Pathname Property Name Property Value X SETUP I 1 I 2 REF U1A DEBUG I 1 I
281. nfigure a viewpoint along with how to use Design Architect to selectively merge back annotation information on to source sheets All about Component Interfaces and Registration Explains the control center for the component structure the Component Interface in more detail This module covers methods for registering and selecting from multiple functional models and symbols in the same component structure plus how different functional models and symbols are selected for use through a labeling mechanism Using Design Manager to Release Designs Describes how to create configurations of design objects and release whole designs to an achieve Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 XV Introduction About This Training Workbook Training Workbook Goals e Introduce Design Architect the Electronic Design Data Model EDDM and the Falcon Framework design environment e Use the Design Architect editors to create schematics and symbols e Create a design bottom up with several levels of hierarchy e Create a design top down using functional blocks e Create design viewpoints then manage and selectively merge back annotations to source sheets e Use Design Manager to release whole designs to an achieve xvi Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 About This Training Workbook Introduction Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 xvii Introduction About This Training Workbook Timeline for Course Completion
282. nformation on instances frames nets any symbol pins left on the sheet or special instances such as bus rippers net connectors globals and offpage connectors An example is displayed on the facing page By default check messages are displayed in a check status window that is displayed at the end of the check and in the Transcript window where they are written during the check process Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 49 Creating a Schematic Saving the Sheet e Sheets must be saved to disk 2 50 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Saving a Sheet The results of your schematic work are only maintained in dynamic memory until you save to disk with a File gt Save Sheet command The data is saved to disk and the schematic is registered to the component interface The registration process includes running a validation check to see if all the ports on the schematic match the pins on the symbol If the ports match the pins the schematic is marked Valid If there is not a one to one match the schematic is marked Not Valid Some downstream tools care if a schematic is marked Not Valid and some tools don t The action the tool takes when it finds a Not Valid schematic depends on the tool Regardless of the results of the validation check the schematic is entered into the Model List in the Component Interface Table This is called registration Desi
283. ng point recognized by finding certain property names and values on instances Any instance which is a termination point in the descent is called a primitive To set which instances are to be considered primitive during evaluation property names and optionally values are listed in the primitive rule If no primitive rules are specified the evaluation stops at instances that have no models Such instances are marked as primitive and appropriate warning or error messages are issued The depth of design evaluation depends on which downstream tool you plan to use For example the PCB viewpoint specifies that any instance with a comp property regardless of value is to be considered primitive The presence of a comp property implies that a physical part exists for that instance A simulation viewpoint on the other hand may need to descend further in order to read a possible schematic based functional model In the primitive definition shown on the left any instance that owns the property named primitive with a value empty_block will be considered primitive by the system You can attach a property like this to the ANALOG FREQ_DET and ACCESS blocks in the card reader design that you created in the last module and the system will know that the blocks are primitive on purpose This eliminates the warning messages and search for non existent models during the design evaluation process If you attach a primitive property to the add_convert block t
284. ng dialog box appears Make Symbol Component Name access_chk Symbol Name Interface Name Symbol Label Create Mode Default New No change Replace OK Reset Cancel Fill in the Component Name entry box with the following access_chk Click OK The comment rectangle becomes a symbol instance the symbol pins become instance pins and the BLOCK_NAME becomes a symbol property that is attached to the symbol body A new component by the name of access_chk is also created in the current working directory Unselect everything on the sheet 4 Repeat the above steps to create the FREQ DET ANALOG and ADD_CONVERT functional blocks Finish the card_reader Schematic 1 5 32 Add the portin and portout instances You can find these symbols in the Symbol History List in the Active Symbol Window Add the wires and buses Rename the NET property values Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Check the Sheet 1 Check the sheet You should get no errors or warnings 2 Close the Check Status window Save the Sheet Open Down into the add_convert Sheet 1 Double click on the border of the ADD_CONVERT functional block The Open Down dialog box is displayed showing all the models that are associated with the add_convert component 2 Select the schematic model in the Available scrolling window then click OK
285. nged external gt External a Reference 1 56 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Copying Design Objects You can use the Design Manager to copy your design or component The Design Manager copies objects in two modes by reference or by containment The simple copy uses containment to determine which objects are copied All objects contained in the component container are copied All resolved references are automatically updated Any references that were unresolved before the copy operation remain unchanged You can modify these unresolved references to point to existing objects using the Design Manager The Design Manager allows all objects within a design object to be copied The figure on the facing page shows schematic reference updating during a simple copy operation A set of schematics A B and C is copied from the first_design directory to the copied_design directory In the directory copied_design the references of A B and C now point to local locations The Design Manager automatically updates references If you did not use the Design Manager to copy the original references would have remained unchanged References to external objects are also copied You can optionally c
286. ning Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features The Logic Symbol Pin Spacing indicator is set to Half Size The indicator specifies whether the symbols are specified as half size or full size The default is Half Size Also notice that the Title Block indicator is set to Yes This means that a title block will be added to the sheet border that you have specified 2 Click OK Notice that the sheet border is added to the add_convert sheet but before you can begin editing the Title Block Information dialog box is displayed on the screen as shown below Notice that the Engineer and Drawn By entry boxes are filled in with your login name The Schematic Title entry box is filled in with the component name which in this case is add_convert The Page Number entry box is filled in with 1 because this is sheet of the schematic 3 Type the following information into the form Revision Level A Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 51 Additional Editing Features Drawing Number 1 4 Click the OK The title block is added to the sheet border Verify the Pin Spacing and Grid Settings Choose the following pulldown menu item Setup gt Net Comment Page gt Page The Setup Page prompt bar is displayed To what values have the pin spacing and user units been set to Click Cancel Choose the following pulldown menu item Setup gt Grid Report Color gt Grid The Grid dialog box is displayed To what values
287. ning Workbook V8 5 1 75 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 13 Highlight the string tempory session 14 Send a copy of the string to the System Clipboard with a 4 stroke 15 Paste a copy back from the System Clipboard to the cursor position witha stroke Do this several times 16 Abandon the edits you made during this exercises by performing the following steps a Choose Menu Bar File gt Revert to Saved A dialog box appears asking you to confirm discarding the edits you made b Click Yes The Notepad displays the unedited file 17 Close the Notepad window by drawing a gt stroke 1 76 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Exercise 3 Viewing and Searching Online Documents Invoking the BOLD Browser with the Help Pulldown Menu Start a BOLD Browser session from any application session window by performing these steps 1 Choose Menu Bar Help gt Open Bookcase If a BOLD Browser session is not running a dialog box appears as follows el ee 2 Click Yes A BOLD Browser session window appears with an Open Bookcase dialog box displayed 3 Maximize the window Maximize Note some window environments may have a menu choice that performs this function Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 77 Design Architect in the Framework Environment If the BOLD Browser does not display the Open Bookcase dialog b
288. ning Workbook V8 5 xiii Introduction About This Training Workbook Course Overview Design Architect T in the Framework Environment module y Creating a Schematic Module 2 y Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 y Additional Editing Features Module 4
289. ns and pin properties The bottom window displays a list of the symbol body properties and logical symbol body properties Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 9 Component Interfaces and Registration Model Labels and the MODEL Property Ia TRAINING da_n my_df c H my_dff gt part schematic schem_id gt sheet lt Graphical Models t TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff default_sym Functional Models va TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic schematic schelgatic ___ Labels default A A D CLK N CLR Label Match qfall 0 qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 model schematic pl 7 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Model Labels and the Model Property Registered models in the model table are assigned one or more labels that are used during the design evaluation process to select models for use The figure on the left page shows how the selection mechanism works When the value of the MODEL property on the symbol body matches a given label for a functional model in the model table that model is selected for use Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 11 Component Interfaces and Registration Creating More than One Schematic Open Sheet Compone
290. nt Name my_dff Sheet Sheet aes Click here Navigator na Startup File Path Available Open Sheet Options Component training da_n card_reader add_convert my_dff schematic sheet Existing New Sheet Specify New Schematic Name Schematic schematico Sheet sheet Sheet Border No Yes Size D 3 Set Cancel Version 0 OK Reset Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Creating More than One Schematic You may create more than one schematic for a component and register it to the component interface As illustrated on the facing page you create a new schematic by clicking on the Options button on the Open Sheet form then specifying the new schematic name Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 13 Component Interfaces and Registration Registering More than One Schematic TRAINING da_n my_df my_dff Default my_dff part schematic schem_id L sheet 4 schematic2 schem_id L sheet N x eed 4 2nd Schematic Registered Pi a ql Graphical Models TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff default_sym Functional Models TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic schematic schematic default TRAINING d
291. nt to copy the entire design to a different workstation To accomplish this you must locate and select all of the elements in the design before the copy The Design Manager provides an easy way to perform this task by providing the following e Configuration window This window provides a convenient way to gather all elements of a distributed design into one place These gathered elements are called a configuration After you create the configuration you can perform copy or release operations on the entire configuration Configuration object This object displayed as an icon in a Design Manager Navigator window is a special design object that corresponds to the contents of the configuration window The configuration object records the exact contents of the configuration after you create it By navigating to and opening the configuration object you can recreate a configuration after you have closed the configuration window To create a configuration follow these steps 1 open a configuration window 2 gather your design objects called primary entries into the window by executing a command or by dragging the objects into the configuration window from a navigator window 3 set your build rules that the Design Manager uses to search for secondary entries which are related to the primary entries by containment or reference 4 build the configuration when completed the configuration window displays the entire configuration and 5 s
292. nts TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Module 3 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 Overview Lesson Creating a Symbol Elements of a Symbol Opening a Symbol Symbol Editor Window The symbol_draw Palette Setting the Symbol Body Defaults Adding Pins Checking the Symbol Changing Required Checks Saving the Symbol Lesson 2 Adding Properties vi What is a Property Property Ownership Property Types Property Text Attributes Symbol Property Text Switches SLD Properties Class Property Values Examples of Global Nets ground VCC Attaching Nets to PCB Power Planes Other Global Nets Common Digital Simulation Properties Common Analog Simulation Properties Common PCB Layout Properties Adding Properties to Symbol Graphics Adding Logical Symbol Properties 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 6 3 8 3 10 3 12 3 14 3 16 3 18 3 20 3 23 3 24 3 26 3 28 3 30 3 32 3 34 3 36 3 38 3 39 3 39 3 39 3 39 3 40 3 42 3 44 3 46 3 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Reporting On and Deleting Logical Symbol Properties 3 50 Changing Property Values 3 52 Selecting Properties__ _ 3 53 Changing Property Values 3 53 Changing Property Attributes__t o____SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 3 53 Setting Up Property Text Attributes 3 54 Quick Report on Property Text SSS 56 Lab Exercises____ 8 59 Print Out the Lab
293. o Level pulldown menu item Remember the more levels of undo you specify the more memory is taken up holding this levels in reserve Not all functions are undoable For example the function executed when you choose the Setup gt Other Options gt Undo Level is not undoable Design Architect will undo the next undoable function that was previously executed and ignores all non undoable functions that followed it Redo lets you recover from unwanted undos and has the same number of levels as undo Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 37 Additional Editing Features Reporting on Schematic Objects 1 Select the Object s 2 Draw the report stroke V or e From the pulldown menu bar Report gt Object gt As Specified Report Object m Attached Pin _ Instance File Mode e SA Ay _ Net __ Attached Property Add Replace No File _ Pin miconmeni File PROJECT da_report_file __ Property mirame _ Text Attribute m Display in Window m Write to Transcript Set All Clear All Selected objects will be used unless handles are specified Handle 1 256 Reset Cancel e 4 38 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Reporting on Objects You can review the status of schematic and symbol objects in the Schematic and Symbol Editor windows by accessing the Report gt Object menu item If you select
294. o o o oo EAA E ee EA e es eines a e ee al eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee T e ane ne ee eo a es aa to N ene E O Ei e o o o o o o o o o o o o gt o o o o o o o o o o GRR ge gen Tana ONO Saree nean ey bea cos e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o e e jo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o eeeeeeeeeeeeuqeeeeee o N E AE A O A Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 61 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Create a Rectangle 1 Click on the ADD RECTANGLE icon Press but do not release the Select mouse button at the location of the first corner of the rectangle Drag the mouse button to the opposite corner and release Draw a 4 stroke If the rectangle is not exactly as shown click the STRETCH icon click the mouse pointer on an edge you want to move then move the pointer to the new edge position and click Create Circles 1 3 Click on the ADD CIRCLE icon Press but do not release the Select mouse button at the center location of the circle Drag the mouse button to the perimeter of the circle and release it With the circle still selected draw a _ stroke to make a copy and place it in the second location for a circle Repeat the above step for the third circle then draw a stroke to unselect all Create Lines 1 3 62 Click on the ADD POLYLINE icon Draw the upper three whiskers by clicking the Select mouse button at one end of the whis
295. o provide a property value where none exists For example suppose you have a design with Rise and Fall properties assigned with various values For a particular simulation you want the Rise property delay to be the same as the Fall property delay The figure on the left shows how to fill out the Add Substitute form This example means substitute the value of the Rise property with the value of the Fall property for each instance in the design The value of the Fall property is unaffected Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 39 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Connecting and Disconnecting Back Annotation Objects DVE __tuseraijdesignermy_designidefault 1 1 BACK ANNOTATION default 2nd Priority f Back Annotation Object connected first in Read Only mode P 1st Priority Back Annotation Object connected last 6 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Connecting and Disconnecting Back Annotation Objects The back annotation objects that are connected to the design viewpoint are listed in the Design Viewpoint window as shown on the left In the illustration the back annotation list in the window indicates that the pcb_design_vpt back annotation object was connect first in read only mode then the back annotation object named default was connected last The back annotation object named default has the highest prior
296. ocument backward ten pages Following Hyperlinks within a Document Hypertext links allow you to travel to a specific location in the document or to a different document Practice using hypertext links to travel within a document by performing the following steps 1 Click on the Table of Contents icon Table of Contents 2 Move the mouse pointer down the items listed in the table of contents Notice how the mouse pointer changes to a hand with a pointing finger as the mouse pointer moves over the hypertext linked section names or page numbers The hypertext links are enclosed in a box on black and white workstations They are indicated by the default color on color workstations usually blue when BOLD Browser is invoked with the Color option 3 Place the pointer on the Section 2 title block and click Section 2 Working with Scopes 4 The first two pages in Section 2 are displayed Following Hyperlinks to Another Document Use a hypertext link to travel to another document by following these steps Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 81 Design Architect in the Framework Environment 1 Click the Left mouse button on time in the middle of page 2 1 The BOLD Browser opens the AMPLE Reference Manual to the reference page for this function page 3 316 2 Click the Select mouse button on date at the bottom of page 3 317 The BOLD Browser moves to the reference page
297. ol labeled default If a symbol doesn t exist a blank window will come up and the new symbol will be named the same as the leaf name of the component interface For example my_dff is the default symbol of the component training da_n card_reader my_dff You may specify a pathname in the File Path entry box This is a pathname to an AMPLE file that contains commands that customize the Symbol Editor environment for this particular symbol When you click Options YES you will see the long form which allows you to change the default values for specific Symbol Editor attributes It contains the additional following information Symbol Name The name of the symbol model This entry box is either blank the default symbol or the name of the symbol that you selected through the Dialog Navigator You can override the contents of this entry by typing a new symbol name Open as These are radio buttons the default is generally Editable Click Read Only to change the mode to read only Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 7 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Symbol Editor Window Design Architect p 1 1572 1 8591 View Hel Report Miscellaneous Check Setup W dae my_dff my_dff Edit MGC File Sel 0 There is no active symbol symbol_draw TEXT UNDO COPY SET SELECT FILTER SESSION DELETE
298. omplished the following three objectives 1 All symbols instantiated on the sheet as shown in the previous figure 2 All instance pins connected as shown in the previous figure 3 Schematic successfully checked with zero errors and warnings Component List The add_convert schematic contains symbols from the following components Components from Mentor Graphics gen_lib MGC_GENLIB vec MGC_GENLIB ground MGC_GENLIB portin MGC_GENLIB portout MGC_GENLIB inv MGC_GENLIB and2 MGC_GENLIB rip use 8X1 symbol MGC_GENLIB rip use 1X1 symbol Components from training da_n component_lib 74ls16la use MG_STD symbol 74259 use MG_STD symbol res alt Special Component Your my_dff component Open a New Schematic for add_convert 1 Activate a Design Architect session window 2 Set the working directory to training da_n card_reader Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 49 Additional Editing Features 3 Click on the OPEN SHEET icon 4 Fill in the Open Sheet dialog box with the following information Component Name add_convert a Click OK A new blank sheet should come up Add a Sheet Border and a Title Block 1 Choose the following pulldown menu item Edit gt Add Sheet Border The Add Sheet Border dialog box is displayed as follows As you can see there are 10 different sizes of sheet borders that are supported by Design Architect The default size is size D 4 50 Design Architect Trai
299. on SETUP 2 Click the PCB choice then click OK Watch the information being added to the Design Configuration window for Board Station tools Open a Schematic View Window on card_reader 1 Click the OPEN SHEET icon Notice that the primitive property values empty_block that were previously added in the last DVE session don t appear Check the Design 1 Check the whole design by executing the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Check Design Notice that the check software is indicating that it expects a number of instances to be non primitive and can t find models for these instances In the next step you will explicitly tell the system that these instances are primitive This will speed up the checking process and eliminate the warning messages The other warnings about the TEST and PARITY nets are normal and expected 2 Close the report window 6 96 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Add a COMP property to each Block on the Root Sheet Assume that the four functional blocks on the card_reader root sheet are four ASICs that will eventually be placed on a single circuit board Although these symbols are treated as functional blocks by the simulator they should be treated as primitive parts by the PCB layout tools For simplicity assume for now that these instances will eventually be replaced by instances with all the correct PCB properties F
300. on it 2 Click on the HIERARCHY WINDOW palette icon ARCHY WINDOW 3 Select the my_dff component in the Navigator Window and click OK Current Component training da_n card_reader my_dff e my_dff schm schematic A latch primitive inv primitive buf primitive __ portin primitive ___ portout primitive z gt The Component Hierarchy window appears and shows you the structure of the my_dff schematic you just created What does the word primitive mean Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 73 Creating a Schematic Exercise 5 Browsing a Component in the Component Window It is helpful to understand the internal structure and content your design You will be observing and changing this structure throughout this training course The following exercise will introduce you to the use of the Component Window 1 Activate the DA Session window by clicking on it 2 Click on the COMP WINDOW icon DFE COMP WINDO 3 Select the my_dff component in the Navigator Window and click OK users train1 training da fy Double Click 4 Double click on the component icon users train1 training da a my_dff Default part 4 schematic i schem_id sheet Notice that the component contains two objects the part object and the sche
301. on the schematic When a symbol is instantiated on a schematic the instance pins which are an active reflection of the symbol pins become the locations at which net connections are made Instance pins are different than symbol pins because instance pins have a builtin net vertex Name Height indicates the height of the pin name with respect to the pin grid Name Placement has three types of pin name placement e Manual The pin name and text location are positioned manually Name with diamond The graphical pin indicator is created and the pin name is positioned next to it Name with diamond and whisker The graphical pin indicator and whisker are created and the pin name is positioned next to it The PinType property associated with each pin can be either IN OUT IXO or omitted Pin Placement designates if the pin is placed to the left top bottom or to the right of the symbol body Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 15 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Checking the Symbol e The Symbol must pass checks before you use it Design Architect Libraries Report Check View Help With Defaults y As Specified Set Defaults Report Check e Typical warnings when changes are made Check Symbol my_dff my_dff LX Check Body 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Interfac 0O errors 6 warnings Warning The following pins on t
302. or delete Many other strokes that you will learn in this module will also carry over to other applications Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 15 Creating a Schematic Placing an Instance on a Sheet e An instance is like an active reflection of a symbol in a library e Placing an instance on a sheet is called instantiating e Click LIBRARY or CHOOSE SYMBOL icon schematic_add_route SESSION ADD ROUTE TEXT DRAW DELETE UNDO MOVE COPY UNSELECT SET SELECT ALL FILTER Click Icon 28 bo Click Icon LIBRARY SYMBOL 2 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Placing an Instance on a Sheet Component libraries contain a wide variety of software models that represent off the shelf electronic components available from IC vendors You can use component libraries supplied by Mentor Graphics third party vendors or you can create your own libraries When you place a symbol on a schematic sheet you are really placing an instance of the symbol that represents that component This is called instantiating a component symbol This instance is not a copy of the component symbol it is more like an active reflection because a direct reference to the symbol is established and maintained Any changes made to the symbol are generally reflected by the instance on the schematic sheet after an explicit update of the symbol
303. or this exercise you will add some common PCB properties to the card_reader root sheet to observe how the design is seen differently through the PCB viewpoint 1 Select all four functional blocks on the card_reader root sheet 2 Click the EDIT button on the palette then click the ADD PROPERTY icon Add Property Eising tte eines Shue Highlighted property name will pee modal e used unless new property name is filled in below 1 Enter New Property Name comp Property Value Property Type N Sted 7P Add to selected objects Yes No Number v Expression BA Name training da_n card_reader pcb_design_vpt 2 Click oK Reset Cancel 3 Fill out the form as shown above then click OK SF Triplet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 97 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 4 Check the design again by executing the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Check Design Notice that the Warnings have gone away concerning the lack of models for non primitive instances Within a PCB viewpoint every instance with a COMP property is considered primitive 5 Close the Report window Open a Back Annotation Window 1 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Open gt Back annotation 2 Click OK A Back Annotation window opens showing you the content of the pcb_design_vpt back annotation object Notice that the COM
304. origin is in the center of the sheet when the new blank sheet is opened for the first time Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 53 Creating a Schematic Using the Component Hierarchy Window WINDOW 2 54 Current Component training da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff schm schematic latch primitive i buf primitive ___ inv primitive i portin primitive portout primitive Hierarchy Hide Show Hierarchy Show Levels ee Setup i Display Y Report Write Default Startup File p Open New Hierarchy Open Sheet Open Symbol A Open VHDL Setup Hierarchy Displa Print All Sheets 5 URAREN Choose A Hierarchy Display Style A Z A x x Slow Full Path o Slow Path Leaf OK Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Using the Hierarchy Window Clicking the HIERARCHY WINDOW icon in the DA Session palette brings up a Hierarchy Window on the component you specify The illustration to the left shows a typical window The hierarchy structure displayed can be set to three different modes through the use of the popup menu Setup gt Display Double clicking on any component labeled schematic reveals the hierarchy structure
305. ose the following pulldown menu item Report gt Interfaces The labels for the schematic2 model entry should be low_speed schematic2 and schematic 2 Close the report window 3 Close all the windows in Design Architect at this time 4 Iconify the DA window at this time 7 38 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Exercise 2 Reload the my_dff Instance on add_convert then Switch Models to schematic2 In this exercise you will invoke DVE on the card_reader sim_vpt viewpoint then use changing values of the MODEL property to switch back and forth between the two schematic models under the my_dff instance Open a DVE Session on the card_reader sim_vpt Viewpoint 1 Bring up the Design Viewpoint Editor and maximize the window 2 Verify that the working directory is set to training da_n card_reader 3 Open the viewpoint named dv sim_vpt 4 Click on the OPEN SHEET icon 5 Select the add_convert instance then choose File gt Open gt Down Switch Models by Changing the MODEL property 1 Select the my_dff instance then choose File gt Open gt Down Notice that the value of the MODEL property is schematic so the original my_dff schematic is opened 2 From the add_convert Schematic window choose the popup menu Change gt Model 3 Select schematic2 from the model list then execute the form Notice that the my_dff schematic wi
306. other is quick and easy The procedure is to open a new window on a second sheet or second schematic You select the objects you want to move or copy execute the MOVE or COPY command then move the mouse cursor to the second window and click Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 45 Creating a Schematic The Context Window Schematic 1 my_dff sheet1 J H Viewing Strokes Double Click View Area View All Zoom In x2 Zoom Out x2 View Centered 2 46 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic The Context Window The Context window is displayed in the lower right corner of the DA Session window The display of the Context window consists of two rectangles The solid patterned rectangle represents the contents of the sheet in the active window and the window shaped hollow rectangle represents the viewing area in the active window The two rectangles in the Context window are moved around to remain in proportion with the active window s border and the extent of the schematic in the window View functionality is available through the strokes shown on the opposite page The top illustration shows the results after a View All action is performed The Schematic Editor windows displays the entire contents of the sheet and the Context window shows that the viewing area is the entire sheet The second illustration shows the results after eithe
307. ou should re validate the existing models The Generate Symbol function can also create a symbol from a piniist file that was created from the Miscellaneous gt Create Pin List pulldown menu Refer to Appendix E in the Design Architect Reference Manual for a description of the pinlist file format Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 23 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks RF_IN 5 24 RF_IN _CLR ANALOG Osc SERIAL_OUT osc ADDRESS_IN FREQ_DET _CLR START PULSE LATCH Lab Overview START PULSE LATCH ULSE S7 START a CLR ACCESS 15 0 ADDRESS_IN ADD_CONVERT READ ACCESS_CHK RED_LED DATA_BUS 15 0 READ GREEN_LED _CLR RED_LED GREEN_LED schematic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Lab Exercises Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 25 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Exercise 1 Creating the card_reader Functional Blocks In this exercise you will create a schematic sheet that contains only functional blocks nets and portin and portout connectors Notice that you are creating a functional block for the add_con
308. ou can reposition the whole window to any place on the screen When you move the pointer to a window corner a Resize cursor appears as shown in the lower left corner and you can press the left mouse button to resize the window You can navigate or move around in directories and files by using the Navigator window The Navigator contains the following areas and controls e Iconic Area Displays icons represented by icons Scroll bars Scroll iconic area vertically and horizontally Navigation buttons Navigate the file system These buttons correspond to the following actions e Explore Down Navigates into the selected directory and displays the objects in that directory e Explore Parent Navigates up one directory or reference level Show References Replaces the current display with the references of the selected design object e Explore Back to Parent Closes the report window of the references currently displayed Go To Displays a dialog box into which you can enter a pathname and then moves directly to that destination You may also type a Unix change directory command like cd user train1 training da_n and the Navigator will move to that location Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 17 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Menus and Mouse Buttons Design Architect MGC File Setup Help Notepad Cleanup Windows
309. ox choose the Menu Bar File gt Open gt Bookcase menu path and double click on the Falcon Framework bookcase a BOLD Browser alo MGC File Search Setup Help Open Document from Bookcase System defined Bookcases r AMPLE Reference Manual Souble Chics eference Manua j AMPLE User s Manual pee aa Board Flow Sequencer Manual BOLD Administrator User s Reference Manual to Open BOLD Browser Reference Manual aaa BOLD Browser User s Manual Common Environment Variables Quick Reference Release A 1 Common User Interface Manual Common User Interface Reference Manual 9 Customizing the Common User Interface Descision Support System DSS Reference Manual OK Reset Cancel Help 4 Double click on Falcon Framework bookcase if it is not already open 5 Scroll down then double click on Customizing the Common User Interface 6 Maximize the Document Window Maximize rar 1 78 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Setting Up the Page Layout You can setup the browser to display one two or four pages at a time The default settings allow you to e Display one page of the document at a time e Turn pages one at a time e Scroll 35 of the page when you use the page up or page down keys View the page at 115 of the original page size 1 Change the Page Layout settings by choosing
310. ox as shown on the left the result is in effect for every existing schematic window and any subsequent schematic windows that are opened in that editor When you choose either the Set Select Filter button in the palette or draw the stroke a dialog box is displayed as shown on the left The three buttons that are displayed at the top Add Route Text and Draw correspond with the three Schematic palette buttons When you are adding instances and creating nets choose the Add Route button to set the appropriate selection filter When you are adding and manipulating property or comment text choose the Text button And when you are creating symbol graphics choose the Draw button Or you can click on the individual object types that you want to be selectable The Reset to MGC Defaults button resets the options to the Mentor Graphics specified defaults You can override the select filter by choosing menus from the Select gt Area Select gt All or Select gt Exterior menus However you only override the filter for that one time The filter remains in effect for subsequent select actions for the current Design Architect session unless you override them for a single operation or change the defaults in the Setup Filter dialog box You can add the appropriate select filter function to a startup file that can be executed any time a sheet or symbol window is opened or you can include this function in a st
311. p 2 amp et P fi 4 Click Here to Open Viewpoint COMP WINDOW FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Unselect A Open Dvpt Popup Me Report Ob Add Prope Open Shee Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Close Dvpt Change Pr S Open Sele Read File Close Win Reopen Se Save Dvpt Reslect Check Des Delete Pro C Open Up Open Dow A e 6 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Invoking DVE The Design Viewpoint Editor is a standalone application just like Design Architect You invoke DVE from the Design Manager in one of two ways e Double Click on the DVE icon in the Tools Window as shown on the left or Select a component icon in the Navigator window press the right mouse button and choose Open gt DVE DVE can also be invoked from a shell by typing MGC_HOME bin dve After DVE comes up it is a good practice to Maximize the window then verify the setting of the working directory Normally the working directory will be set to the pathname specified by the shell environmental variable MGC_WD if this variable is defined otherwise the working directory is set to the same location as the shell from which DVE is invoked It is always best to verify that the working directory is set to the location where you want
312. point for QuickSim 1 Click the SETUP VPT icon SETUP 2 Select the name Quick_Sim_Fault_Path_Grade 3 Click OK and watch the information being added to the Design Configuration window for QuickSim Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 85 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Open a Schematic View Window on card_reader 1 Click the OPEN SHEET icon The sheet1 in the window title indicates that you are looking at the root sheet for card_reader top level Check the Design 1 Check the whole design by executing the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Check Design Notice that the check software is indicating that it expects three instances on the root sheet to be non primitive and can t find models for these instances You should explicitly tell the system that these blocks are primitive This will speed up the checking process and eliminate the warning messages The other warnings about the TEST and PARITY nets are normal and expected 2 Close the Report window Declare Empty Blocks as Primitive 1 Click the ADD PRIM icon 6 86 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 2 Fill out the form as shown in the following illustration OK Reset Cancel 3 Click OK Observe that the primitive property has been added to the PRIMITIVE rule in the Design Configuration window 4 Select the ACCESS CHK FREQ DET a
313. properties and body properties must be identical Only the symbol graphics may differ When there is more than one symbol registered to a component interface only one of the symbols may have the label default_sym This symbol is used when you instantiate the component and don t specify which symbol you want to use Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 23 Component Interfaces and Registration Validating Models sgistered Model Info mi Tii SAAN di i MERA ii i CE my_dff_ STRAINING da_nicard_reader my dif oS TRAINING da_n my_df iS p my_dff Default Graphical Models i ANSI STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff t my_dff TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff ANSI part default_sym schematic schem_id Functional Models L sheet1 TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic 4 schematic 6 schematic2 schematic schem_id Z default gt sheet1 TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic2 og schematic a Ps scher Hide Models List JAN Show Labels Ia Selected EEIEEEEE sen gt Models my_dff_ STRAININ mvdf D Edit ei Unregister Models CLK PRE Search Validate Models i LR A FoRo Add Labels QB 7 A Delete Labels STRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic of type mgc_sche
314. r Schematic 2 Select the add_convert instance 3 Replace the model with the add_convert_test symbol by choosing Edit gt Replace gt Alternate Symbol 4 Check and Save the sheet 7 42 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration 5 6 Open down into the ADD_CONVERT block select schematic_test then click OK You now have access to both schematics When the design is loaded into the QuickSim simulator either schematic may be select just by specifying the matching label name as the value of the MODEL property Close all the windows in the DA Session Reload the add_convert Model from the Sim_vpt Viewpoint 1 2 Open DVE on the viewpoint training da_n card_reader sim_vpt Choose the pulldown menu Edit gt Latch Version gt Unlatch Version Click the ALL button then click OK Reload all models with the Edit gt Reload Model gt All menu item Observe that the updated card_reader schematic has the new add_convert_test instance Relatch the viewpoint Save and Close the viewpoint End of Lab Exercise Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 43 Component Interfaces and Registration 7 44 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 8 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Lesson 1 Design References Review __SSS C 8 3 Lesson 2 Creating a Configuration and Releasing a Design ___ C 8 133 Lab Exercises B25 Exploring Reference
315. r a View Area or Zoom In action The Schematic Editor window displays the partial view of the sheet and the Context window shows the relationship of the viewing area with respect to the entire sheet The viewing strokes can be done in either the Schematic Window or the Context Window itself If you use the Context window to identify the viewing area and are concerned about screen real estate you can hide the scroll bars associated with the active window by typing the hide_scrolls function in the popup command line Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 47 Creating a Schematic Checking the Sheet e Sheets must pass required set of checks Design Architect Libraries Report Check View Help Sheet Schematic Set Defaults i With Defaults y gt As Specified Set Defaults Parameters Report e Displays check status window L Check Sheet my_dff schematic sheet1 A Check SymbolPins 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Overlap 0O errors 0 warnings Check NotDots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Closedots 0O errors 0 warnings Check Dangl 0O errors 0 warnings Check INIT Properties OQ errors 0 warnings Check Owner 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Instanc O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special O errors 0 warnings MGC requi
316. r applications Automatically setup for a Downstream Application This has already been discussed View schematic sheets or VHDL models in your design You can use the Schematic View Window to manipulate the back annotation properties on a schematic sheet displayed in that window However you can not manipulate the nets instances and SLD properties on the schematic like you can in the Design Architect Schematic Editor window Add modify and delete back annotated property values This includes changing the value of the Model property which changes the selection of the functional model underneath the instance Importing an ASCII back annotation file into a back annotation object is an alternate method of back annotating a design This can be used for example when you receive a set of timing values from an ASIC vendor In like manner data in a back annotation object can be exported to an ASCH back annotation file to provide a simple medium for editing and transporting the data Check the syntax of your entire design This check is design wide in the context of the design viewpoint configuration This check is different from the checking in DA in that DA only checks a single schematic sheet or multiple sheets at the same level DVE performs extensive checks of the entire design hierarchy with respect to the rules in the design configuration Latching a viewpoint This action freezes the design object versions that the viewpoint is invok
317. r means that you are in the ADD WIRE mode You can keep adding wires to the schematic until you exit the mode by clicking the Cancel button on the prompt bar Mid command freedom is a feature that allows you to execute another command before you finish executing the current command In the bottom illustration on the facing page the stacked prompt bars indicate that three commands were suspended in mid command while a fourth command edit_source is being executed Once the current command is finished executing the system returns to the previous command At any time you can click the Cancel button on the prompt bar to clear it from the screen but it must be the prompt bar on the top of the stack Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 27 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Strokes e You use the Middle mouse button e A strokes pattern is converted to a number sequence from the grid 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 Unselect All stroke_1478963 e To get help on strokes Draw the Question Mark stroke 1 Start here 7 S 2 Hold down Stroke mouse A button and drag mouse P 3 Release mouse button _ y 1 28 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Strokes Strokes are another way of issuing commands within applications You can activate stroke mode by pressing the Drag Stroke mouse button usually the middle button and then you use the
318. ramework Environment 1 40 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Lesson 4 Viewing and Searching Online Documentation A large resource of online documentation can be accessed through the BOLD Browser This lesson shows you how to view the vast array of online documentation and perform a full text search on any given topic Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 41 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Online Help e Help menu options Design Architect MGC File Setup Help On Commands On Functions On Keys D On Strokes On Menus On Palettes Open Tutorial Open Procedure Open Index Open Bookcase More Help E On Properties On Shortcuts y On Help On Version On SupportCenter Release Notes Highlights Documentation Roadmap 1 42 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Online Help You can access Design Architect online help through the Help menu in the menu bar The following list describe what you can access from online help On Commands Provides Quick Help or Reference Help of Design Architect commands or a summary table of commands and functions For a list of commands in the active window type then Ctrl SHIFT On Functions Provides Quick Help or Reference Help of Design Architect functions or a summary table of com
319. ration that uses the selection set is performed o One selection set per sheet is maintained Selection filter o Used with mouse pointer o Function keys do not use selection filter Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Selection Concepts Types of Selection You select objects so that you can manipulate them with commands such as Move and Copy You select a single object by clicking the Select mouse button on an unselected object This is called point selection When you click the Select mouse button on an already selected object it becomes unselected You can select many objects by pressing the Select mouse button moving the cursor to the opposite corner of the rectangular area with the mouse button and releasing it This is called area selection Selection Modes The default selection mode is additive Each object you select is added to the object already selected You may switch to the individual selection mode by choosing Setup gt Set gt Individual Selection Model from the DA Session window In this mode when you click on an object all others are unselected unless you hold down the Ctrl Key Selection Sets As you select objects they are added to the selection set when in the additive selection mode Operations that use the selection set are any of the following Move Copy Flip Rotate Delete Pivot Change and Report After one of these operations objects are still selected but the sel
320. re a downstream tool like a simulator can operate on it The object in the data model that allows a downstream tool to view the source schematic as fully evaluated data is called a design viewpoint You may conceptually think of a design viewpoint object as a picture frame through which the downstream tool views the schematic In your mind s eye think of the image of the source schematic as being reflected onto the back of the glass in the picture frame Notice in the diagram that the simulator sees the fully evaluated data through the viewpoint 15 in this case even though the expression on the source schematic X 5 doesn t change The value of X can be defined elsewhere on the schematic or defined in the viewpoint itself Because the glass in the viewpoint protects the source schematic you can t change the source schematic from the downstream tool You can appear to change the schematic however by selecting a property in the simulator Schematic View Window and making a change The change is recorded in a Back Annotation object which is conceptually represented as a transparent sheet laid over the top of the glass in the viewpoint In the figure the timing value in front of the center and gate is changed from 5 to 10 nanoseconds The simulator sees 10 ns as shown in the lower figure even though the source schematic is unchanged All downstream tools must view the source schematic through a viewpoint Typically if a schematic doesn
321. re renumbered starting at 1 and record keeping information is stored You are not allowed to modify a released design using Idea Station applications The Protect property is added to these design objects If you need to edit released data use one of the following options e Fix the original design and release it again using the same configuration Only the files that have changed since the original release will be merged This may not be possible if the original design has significantly evolved Copy the released design to a new location This copy is not protected Make changes to the copy and then release it Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 19 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Versions Types of data versioned and unversioned Directories unversioned containers both Idea Station maintains two versions of design objects e You can O O 8 20 Change version depth Copy version Delete version Revert to previous version Display version number Freeze unfreeze a version Release multiple versions Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Versions When you invoke an application and develop your design you create design objects As you edit your design those design objects change The current and previous states of a design object are called versions Mentor Graphics provides two kinds of design data versioned and unversioned Versioned design o
322. red Check Net 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Fram 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff schematic sheet1 passed check 0 Errors 0 Warnings IL 7 E Z 2 48 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Checking the Sheet To ensure that you produce a valid workable circuit a full set of checks must be passed Many downstream Mentor Graphics applications require schematic sheets to pass a set of checks In addition to the required checks Design Architect includes a set of optional checks that can be incorporated into your design check and validation process Designs are not complete until they have passed the minimum required checks If a sheet does not pass the required checks before a downstream application is invoked the downstream application typically issues a warning message There are three levels of checking 1 report all errors and warnings 2 report only errors and 3 do not check By default all required checks are set to the errors and warnings check level Optional checks are set to a nocheck level You can specify sheet checks and schematic checks Sheet checks validate only the contents of the sheet in the active window Schematic checks actually validate all of the sheets of the schematic You can check your sheet using the default check levels by selecting Check gt Sheet gt With Defaults from the pulldown menu bar Generally the report generated from this check provides i
323. rences using the Design Manager You can modify DA created references using the Design Manager or Design Architect However if you modify these references within the Design Manager you run the risk of modifying them incorrectly You can display design object references by invoking the Report gt Show References menu path in the Design Manager pulldown menu or you can click on the Show References right arrow icon in the Navigator window The Design Manager also provides other navigation buttons to allow you to explore a design object s references enabling you to traverse the design hierarchy The illustration on the facing page shows two concepts 1 the component hierarchy and the reference pathnames and 2 references that are created by the Design Manager and those that are created by Design Architect The component hierarchy is defined by the solid arrows the reference pathnames are defined by the dashed arrows When a symbol or schematic sheet is created they are placed under the specified component Reference pathnames are automatically defined by Design Architect Thus the symbol model PROJ_A my_design my_design contains a reference to the component interface PROJ_A my_design part Notice that PROJ_A my_design part also contains a reference to the symbol PROJ_A my_design my_design The schematic model also contains a reference to PROJ_A my_design part In addition the schematic model contains a reference to the sheet PROJ
324. report window and observe that the version number and the latch status is recorded for each design object 3 Close the Report window Unlatch the sim_vpt Back Annotation Object You are now going to unlatch the sim_vpt back annotation object so future changes can be recorded in the object 1 Selecting EDIT gt Latch Version gt Unlatch Version from the pulldown menu 2 Click the BA button then click OK Save and Close the Simulation Viewpoint 1 From the pulldown menu bar choose File gt Save Design Viewpoint 2 Click the CLOSE VPT icon on the Setup palette 6 94 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Exercise 2 Creating a PCB Viewpoint In this lab exercise you will create a PCB viewpoint on the same design You will annotate the design with different property values and the configuration will be set differently so that all instances with a comp property will be treated as primitive Create a PCB Viewpoint 1 Click the OPEN VPT icon EP PT OPEN VPT The Open Design Sheet dialog box is displayed pcb_design_vpt NOYES 2 Click oK 2 Fill in the information shown above then click OK The name pcb_design_vpt is the only valid name you can use for o a PCB design viewpoint Note Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 95 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Setup the Viewpoint for PCB 1 Click the SETUP VPT ic
325. rt schematic sheet1l passed check 0 Errors 0 Warnings Ll ji R 2 Close the Check Status window Save the Sheet Save the sheet to disk as you have done in previous exercises Report on Sheet Status 1 Select an area that contains instances within the sheet 2 Choose the following pulldown menu item Report gt Object gt As Specified 4 56 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features The Report Object dialog box is displayed 1 Report Object __ Attached Pin m Instance PLG uoce Net Pe 4 v _ Attached Property Add Replace No File m Pin __ Comment n File da_report_file m Property _ Frame m Text Attribute m Display in Window Write to Transcript Set All Clear All Selected objects will be used unless handles are specified Handle OK Reset Cancel 2 Click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Click the Instance Net Pin Property and Text Attribute boxes as shown above 4 57 Additional Editing Features A report window similar to the following is displayed specifying all instance pin net property and text attributes information associated with the selected objects Reporting Instance Net Pin Property A Text Attribute Instance Name Location Version I 2 SMGC_GENLIB inv inv 1 00 3 50 2 flipped vertica
326. rties that are reserved for Mentor Graphics applications This list includes properties with user defined values which are used for the downstream applications and Structured Logic Design SLD properties Many downstream applications require a minimum set of properties that must be attached to the design You must add or modify these properties to your design before you begin evaluation in any of the downstream applications Once in the downstream application you can change instance specific property values and back annotate them to the design viewpoint They can then be merged to the source schematic sheet at a later time using Design Architect The following is a list of common properties that are used by the QuickSim digital simulator e PINTYPE Specifies the direction of a pin Possible values are IN OUT and IXO This value may also be omitted e RISE Specifies minimum typical and maximum rise delay for an instance The time is specified in nanoseconds FALL Specifies minimum typical and maximum fall delay for an instance The time is specified in nanoseconds DRIVE Specifies the output pin s drive strength Some possible values are SSS for CMOS TTL and ECL technologies SRR for NMOS technologies and RRS for PMOS technologies MODEL Specifies which functional and timing descriptions are to be used for digital simulation The MODEL property value is matched against the model labels in the model table to deter
327. rty type of property A is a character string and you assigned the value of 95 this value is interpreted as a character string 95 not the numerical value of 95 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 29 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Text Attributes e A property value is also called property text e Attributes of property text include 3 30 O O O Justification Orientation Height Font Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Text Attributes When the value of a property is displayed the value is called property text Property text has several attributes that define what the text will look like once it is placed on the design Each property can have its own unique set of attributes Attributes that can be defined and later modified are e Justification Sets the text s horizontal and vertical justification relative to a location point Horizontal justification can be set to the left edge center or right edge of the text string Vertical justification can be set to the top edge center or bottom edge of the text string The justification point serves as a point around which it can be rotated The system defined default is bottom left Orientation Indicates the direction the text faces Choose 0 to indicate text is oriented horizontally and read from left to right or 90 to indicate text is oriented vertically and re
328. s _ SSS 8 26 Verifying and Changing References 8 29 Creating and Copying a Configuration _____ CO E 3 1 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 1 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Module 8 Overview Design Architect il in the Framework Environment Module 1 See y _ fi Creating a Schematic Module 2 y Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 y Additional d J Editing Features l Module 4 Design Hierarchy and il J Functional Blocks Module 5
329. s modeled by an object oriented database and each object is represented by one or more directories or files in the Unix file system To make things simpler these objects are represented by icons when you view them through a window such as the Navigator If an object is really a Unix directory in the file system it is called a container A container can contain other objects The icon at the top of the illustration on the facing page shows the icon for a component structure Because a component is a container it contains several other objects such as the part object the symbol object and the schematic object The schematic object is also a container and can contain one or more sheet objects The schem_id object is a special object that helps the system manage the assignment of system identifiers handles to various objects on the schematic sheets The subject of handles will be covered in a later module The part object is a special object that contains the Component Interface table Remember that this table acts like the control center of the component where information about the symbol pins symbol body properties and each model is collect and retained Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 9 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Component Within a Component x4 gern wt Component Structure Instanc
330. se the symbol MY_DESIGN is created with the Design Architect symbol editor and registered with the MY_DESIGN component structure Notice that the new symbol contains three input pins and three output pins to match the three input ports and three output ports on the schematic The new MY_DESIGN symbol can now be instantiated on a new higher level schematic sheet that may represent the electronics of a more complex system Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 11 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Viewpoint Conceptual View Design Architect Design PI 7 JZ Viewpoint ae capa Editor P SET k VIEWPOINT s U I gt Open J S l Bae OPEN VPT Simulator Back Annotation Object x gt 10 6 Source chematic Simulator Simulator Design Viewpoint What the Simulator Sees 1 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Design Viewpoint Conceptual View Schematics are represented by files and directories in a software environment so they can take on some of the characteristics of a software program For example a timing value can be represented by a numeric expression such as X 5 as shown in the figure on the left This expression must be evaluated to a constant befo
331. se 3 Generating a card_reader Symbol Next you will automatically generate a card_reader symbol from the card_reader schematic From the active card_reader Schematic window execute the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Generate Symbol Fill out the form as shown below Generate Symbol Component Name training da_n card_reader Symbol Name card reader q ass 1 Verify Replace existing Once generated Activate symbol y Yes Save Symbol y Yes A No Edit Symbol No 2 Verify Save and Edit Symbol must be saved Choose Source Pinlist File Schematic __ 3 Verify Va Z Schematic Name schematic Component Name training da_n card_reader P Navigator Current Shape box Pin Spacing in pin grids 2 Shape Argumente ea A Sort Pins v Choose Shape a Yes No 4 Click Choose a Symbol Shape Min Width 6 Min Height 2 5 Verify gt 4 Shape And Gate Or Gate Xor Gate Buffer Box y AndOr OrAnd Trapezoid 6 Change 7 Click ok Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 35 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 9 10 11 Verify that card_reader is specified as the component pathname Verify that the Schematic button is selected Verify that the existing card_reader pathname is specified to receive the new symbol 4 Choose the graphic characteristics of the new symbol
332. ses b Place the mouse cursor at the beginning of the set_active_window line press the left mouse button and drag the cursor down and across the set_active_window line the form_setup_session line and the entire setup_page line then release the button 2 Press the right mouse button and execute Copy to Clipboard gt System Open a New File and Paste the Transcript from the Clipboard 1 Execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Notepad gt New A new untitled Notepad window appears 2 Place the mouse cursor in the Notepad window press the right mouse button and execute paste 3 Click the mouse cursor at the beginning of the second line and type This turns this line into a comment line non executable The Notepad window should now look like the following L Sset_active_window ol_session form_setup_session 125 xll_pointer up_down true true Ssetup_page 2 2 true true false 35 115 2 E iR Save the New File as bold_browser startup 1 Close the Notepad window with a gt stroke 2 Answer Yes to the Query form 3 Type the pathname HOME mgc startup bold_browser startup in the entry box and press Return A 12 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Customizing Exercises Test the New bold_browser startup File 1 Close the BOLD Browser window 2 Click the bold_browser icon again in the Design Manager Tools window 3 Type
333. sign Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 41 Additional Editing Features Setting Check Levels for Sheets e Check gt Sheet gt Set Defaults Design Architect Libraries Report Check View Help Sheet A Schematic Set Defaults With Defaults As Specified Set Defaults y Parameters Report e Displays Default Sheet Check Settings Errors Errors No Errors Errors No Userrule Checks Warnings Only Check Warnings Only Check va lt gt All No Check Instance o Q Parameter v o pA Expressions Macro File Special OS Owner Da gt M File Mode A Overlap Net lt P lt gt p d KP VL O O v 4 A A Era 2 O NV Add Replace No File Frame y A Closedots p File da_check_file Symbol Pins Dangles A AEE T Required check category INIT Props _ Display in Window Annotations m Write to Transcript OK Reset Cancel 4 42 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Setting Check Levels for Sheets You can change the sheet check level defaults by selecting the Check gt Set Defaults gt Sheet menu item Required Sheet Checks Instances Checks for a valid Inst value instance registered with an interface Special instances Checks port offpage net global bus ripper null Nets Checks for valid net names duplicate net names Fra
334. strean tool to view the source schematic as fully evaluated data is called a design viewpoint You may conceptually think of a design viewpoint object as a picture frame through which the downstream tool views the schematic In your mind s eye think of the image of the source schematic as being reflected onto the back of the glass in the picture frame Notice in the diagram that the simulator sees the fully evaluated data through the viewpoint 15 in this case even though the expression on the source schematic X 5 doesn t change The value of X can be defined elsewhere on the schematic or defined in the viewpoint itself Because the glass in the viewpoint protects the source schematic you can t change the source schematic from the downstream tool You can appear to change the schematic however by selecting a property in the simulator Schematic View Window and making a change The change is recorded in a Back Annotation object which is conceptually represented as a transparent sheet laid over the top of the glass in the viewpoint In the figure the timing value in front of the center and gate is changed from 5 to 10 nanoseconds The simulator sees 10 ns as shown in the lower figure even though the source schematic is unchanged All downstream tools must view the source schematic through a viewpoint Typically if a schematic doesn t have a viewpoint the downstream tool creates one automatically when the tool is invoked on the desi
335. symbol is not on the interface Warning Property qrise on the symbol is not on the interface Warning Property qbfall on the symbol is not on the interface Warning Property qfall on the symbol is not on the interface Warning Property model on the symbol is not on the interface Check Pin 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0O errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff my_dff passed check 0 Errors 5 Warnings I IN we 3 80 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties a Close the Check Status window The symbol window is automatically reactivated Save the Symbol 1 Select the following pulldown menu item File gt Save Symbol 2 Check the symbol again The Check window is shown below MW H Check Symbol my_dff my_dff Check Body O errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Interfac 0O errors 0 warnings Check Pin OQ errors 0 warnings MGC required Check Special 0 errors 0 warnings MGC required my_dff my_dff passed check 0 Errors 0 Warnings E is Notice this time there are no errors or warnings When the symbol was saved the component interface table was updated to match the new information on the symbol 3 Close the Check Status window then close the Symbol window Resave the my_dff Schematic When you resave a symbol that has changed the compon
336. tain object types for which the property information is most meaningful For example pins own Pin_no properties the value of Pin_no properties are meaningful only to pins Most property names and values are defined when a symbol is created but additional properties may be added to instances on a sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 25 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Ownership e A property is typically attached to a design object called an owner e Properties can be restricted to certain types of owners Allows you to manipulate properties by specifying the owner object O O O 3 26 The following design objects can own properties Symbol Bodies Symbol Pins Instance Bodies Instance Pins Nets wires and buses Comment Graphics not Comment Text Frames Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Property Ownership Properties are typically attached to a single object in the design When you create a property you can restrict which objects can own that property through the Setup gt Property Owner Type gt Property Owner pulldown menu item Other common Mentor Graphics properties have predefined owners assigned You can see a list of these properties by choosing the pulldown menu item Report gt Default Property Values Once property ownership is defined for a property Design Architect does not allow that property to be
337. tances on the sheet as shown on the schematic Repeat the above procedure by selecting the portout symbol from the Symbol History list and placing the instances on the sheet Unselect all instances with a 4 stroke when you are finished Connect the Instance Pins with Wires 1 2 4 2 66 Draw a gt stroke to include all schematic elements in the viewing area Draw a stroke to enter the Add Wire mode The ADD WI prompt bar appears at the bottom of the window The editor will remain in this mode until you click Cancel Connect all instance pins with wires as shown in the schematic diagram Click once at the start of each wire once for each corner point vertex and twice at the ending point Unselect the wire with a 4 stroke before drawing the next wire If you place a net vertex in the wrong place and haven t finished defining the wire with a double click use the BackSpace key to move backward and delete the vertices If you finish a wire and want to remove it make sure it is the only object selected then draw a D stroke a Click Cancel when you are finished adding all the wires Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Assign Each Port a Unique Net Name Notice that every instance of portin and portout has a default NET property value of NET You must change each of these to a unique name or they will be considered shorted together by the EDDM database Select all
338. tation Importing and Exporting Back Annotation ASCII Files Exporting and importing back annotation data in ASCII form is a way to transfer data between back annotation objects ASIC vendors may use this simple medium to transfer physical layout back annotation information to customers at remote sites The figure on the left illustrates how the information in a back annotation object may be exported as an ASCII text file The ASCII file is formatted in a way that uses certain key words that are meaningful to the transfer of data in this format The keywords are fully explained in the DVE User s and Reference Manual In a similar manner the information in an ASCII back annotation file may be imported to another specified back annotation object Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 53 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Configured Design Checks Component Interface Checks Ps w Schematic Diagram Checks Schematic Sheet Checks 6 54 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Checking the Whole Design DVE can perform extensive checks of the entire design hierarchy using rules in the design configuration and your target tool These checks also examine the design for mismatched connections unique names and parameter values DVE uses the check_design function The checks are also performed during the invocation of QuickSim II o
339. te 741236987 Undo 7412369 Select Area 74123 Unselect All 1478963 Setup Select Filter 32147 Flip Horizontally 9632147 Rotate 90 3698741 Report Selected 1474123 Set Active Symbol 321456987 Add Property 32159 Modify Property 95123 Add Wire 258 Add Bus 852 Route Selected 96321 _ Connect Selected 7896321 Connect All 1236987 4 Display Schematic Palette 78963 Display Default Palette 98741 a Place Active Symbol 14789 Choose Symbol lt 36987 Stroke Recognition Grid 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt Help on Strokes 123658 Print More help on strokes Ref Help Close 2 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Schematic Design Architect Strokes The concept of strokes was discussed in Module 1 and will be emphasized in this course as one of the most productive methods for schematic entry The default strokes available in Design Architect are shown on the left This form can be displayed by drawing a question mark stroke It is often helpful to make a photocopy of this form cut it up into strips and tape the strips on the edges of your display After you use the strokes over time you will remember them and they will come to you naturally almost without thinking You have already learned some of the common strokes like C for copy U for unselect and D f
340. te it now as follows a Select the following menu item from the Design Manager menu bar Add gt Directory The Add Directory prompt bar is displayed b Fill in the ADD DIRECTORY prompt bar as shown below ADD DI Directory Pathname training Ok Cancel c Click OK You will see the training directory added to the list of other objects displayed in the Navigator window 5 View the contents of the training directory a Double Click on the training directory icon to expose its contents There should be nothing in the training directory at this time 6 Navigate to the MGC_HOME shared training directory as follows 1 66 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment a Click the Go To button in this Navigator window as illustrated below e gt b Enter the following in the text entry box MGC_HOME shared training c Click OK The Navigator window displays the MGC_HOME shared training directory in the master tree Follow the directions in the illustration on the next page to copy the da85nwp training data to your local training directory Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 67 Design Architect in the Framework Environment a Design Manager HO MGC Object Edit Setup Windows View Add Report Help Tools E Aa Navigator j al A AOA EE M
341. the Explore References right arrow button in the Navigator window A report window is displayed which contains the reference pathname to the file card_reader rel_notes b Click on the Explore Back to Parent left arrow button to close the report window 5 View the contents of the card_reader component a Double click on the card_reader icon 8 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Using Design Manager to Release Designs b What type of objects do you see at the level directly below the card_reader component 6 View the contents of the my_dff component a Double click on the my_dff component The contents of the my_dff directory is displayed in the Navigator window b Click on the my_dff symbol icon and click the Explore References button A report window is displayed c To what other object s does the my_dff symbol reference d Click on the Explore Back to Parent button to close the report window e Click on the part icon and click the Explore References button A report window is displayed f To what other object s does the part object reference g Click on the Explore Back to Parent button to close the report window h Click on the schematic icon and click the Explore References button A report window is displayed i To what other object s does the schematic model reference j Click on the Explore Back to Parent button to close the report window k With the schematic icon still selected click on th
342. the bundle end connects to a bus or bundle The other end connects to a wire sub bus or sub bundle You can find the bus ripper component in MGC_GENLIB rip The first example shown on the facing page displays the 8X1 bus ripper symbol In addition the following ripper symbols are available within the rip component 1X1 1X2 1X3 1X4 Ir 1r2 4X1 3X1 2X1 and 16X1 Each bus ripper has a Class property value of r indicating that the component is used to extract a range of lines from a bus Each pin on a ripper symbol has a Rule property The Rule property called the Ripping Rule identifies the bus lines that the ripper pin taps When the bus ripper symbol is first instantiated each Rule property is set to a default value of R Each bus ripper symbol has at least two pins the wire end and the bundle end as the figure on the facing page illustrates The bundle end is actually a pin that has a Pin property value called bundle The wire end is also a pin and for Mentor Graphics supplied bus rippers has a Pin property value called wire Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 15 Additional Editing Features Manually Connecting a Wire to a Bus e Manual Connection o Bundle end of ripper must be graphically connected to the bus o Wire end of ripper must be graphically connected to a single wire or sub bus BUS 0 7 BUS 0 7 Wire _ Wire incorrect bundle end extends towards
343. the lab exercises for Module 3 If you have time turn to Appendix A Customizing Exercises and do the following 1 Exercise 3 learn how to add a Navigator button to the set_working_directory dialog box 2 Exercise 4 learn how to change the Modify Property stroke to a stroke that is easier to draw 3 84 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Module 4 Additional Editing Features Lesson 1 Additional Editing Features__ _ SSCS 43 Lab Exercises 4A Creating a Hierarchical Design __ SESSSSSS S S SSSSS CSSSSS S 48 Browsing the add_convert Component in the Component Hierarchy Window _ 4 59 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 1 Additional Editing Features Module 4 Overview Design Architect in the
344. the manual title Customizing the Common User Interface in the entry box and execute the form with a gt stroke 4 Click on the BOLD Browser Maximize button Notice that the manual came up with two pages up 5 Click the page icons and notice that the pages turn two at a time 6 Close the BOLD Browser window when you are finished browsing the customizing manual Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 A 13 Customizing Exercises Exercise 2 Creating a startup file for da_session Introduction It is often hard to remember to set your working directory after an application comes up In the following exercise you will create a startup file that executes the set_working_directory function immediately after the Design Architect application is invoked Open a New Notepad File and Enter the set_working_directory Function Name 1 From any application window such as Design Manager Design Architect or BOLD Browser activate the session area and execute the pulldown menu MGC gt Notepad gt New A new untitled Notepad window appears 2 Type set_working_directory in the blank window Save the New File as da_session startup 1 Close the Notepad window with a stroke 2 Answer Yes to the Query form 3 Type the pathname HOME mgc startup da_session startup in the entry box and press Return Test the New da_session startup File 1 Click the design_arch icon in the Design Manager Tools window Observe that the S
345. the opposite page shows the options you have in setting up bus rippers The Schematic Editor will produce implicit bus rippers by default If you choose Automatic the specified explicit bus ripper is automatically added each time you connect a net to a bus or bundle If you set the mode to None you must manually add bus rippers to the schematic just like you would any other instance None Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 21 Additional Editing Features Automatically Connecting a Bus Ripper aD 2 Double Click A 1X1 Ripper Added Automatically RULE property value Choose Bus Bit Bus Name BUS 0 7 Bit 6 4 x 3 Enter bit number o A 4 Reset Cancel 4 22 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Automatically Connecting a Bus Ripper If you specify the Ripper setup to be Automatic the specified ripper symbol is automatically added each time you connect a net to a bus or bundle A popup form appears requesting a value for the RULE property If you are connecting a net to a bundle the value of the RULE must match the name of an element in the bundle Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 23 Additional Editing Features The Sequence Text Function TEXT 1 Click Icon NAME 1 NAME 2 NAME 3 SEQUENCE TEXT Sequence Text New Prefix Beginning In
346. the symbol is instantiated on the sheet the symbol text is visible Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Opening a Symbol e Click the OPEN SYMBOL icon e Enter the component pathname e Use the Navigator button for existing component Open Symbol Component Name HOME training da_n card_reader my_dff Navigator Pathname for Symbol Specific Startup Script File Path Use the Navigator to find existing components Options NO YES Open as Editable Symbol Name 4 Read Only Optionally Specify Symbol Name B Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Opening a Symbol The Symbol Editor lets you create and edit component symbols that can then be placed in schematic sheets as instances The internal functionality of the circuit being represented by the symbol may or may not be defined at the time the symbol is created After you click the OPEN SYMBOL icon you must specify the pathname for the component If a component structure doesn t exist at that location Design Architect creates one before the Symbol wIndow is opened Generally if the component exists it is more convenient to click the Navigator button and navigate to the component location If you click OK without specifying a Symbol Name the Symbol window will be opened on the symb
347. the wires that are directly connected to the portin and portout instances Make sure that you only have these nets selected 1 Press the Right mouse button and choose Name Nets from the popup menu This menu item lets you change the net name of each selected net in sequence The Change Property Value prompt bar is displayed as shown below one at a time for each net name from the top most to the bottom most selected net without regard to horizontal placement CHA PR VA Property Name NET New Value NET Type string OK Cancel In this case the first net name that is highlighted is the name associated with the top most portin instance 2 Use the BackSpace key to remove NET from the entry box enter PRE and press RETURN CHA PR VA Property Name NET New Value PRE Type string OK Cancel Change Value Here Another prompt bar is displayed with the name of the net that is second from the top Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 67 Creating a Schematic 3 Backspace over NET enter Q and press RETURN 4 Change the net names of the remaining selected nets in a similar manner Unselect the last object when you are finished Generate a Report to Discover Handle Names The Schematic Editor assigns system generated names to objects placed on a sheet These system generated names are called handles Examples of handle names are I 2 for an instance
348. tic edit mode is set to on you can merge all back annotations displayed on the current schematic sheet using the Miscellaneous gt Merge Annotations menu item To merge selected back annotated properties you must first select the properties that you want to merge onto the schematic sheet After you have selected the visible back annotation properties you can then execute the Miscellaneous gt Merge Annotations gt Selected menu item If you view a schematic sheet after a successful merge and save you will notice that the schematic sheet displays the previously merged properties and property values in the color of the owning object Property values may not be successfully merged if the property has its property stability switch set to fixed or protected In addition if the viewpoint is latched on anything other than the most current version of the schematic they won t be merged If the back annotation object is connected in read only mode the annotations will be merged but won t be removed from the back annotation object Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 79 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Back Annotations and Reusable Sheets Reusable Sheet gh SE __ UA or U1B Design Architect Training Workbook
349. ting of the edit mode and the current state of editing controls where and how the properties are added or modified as the table on the facing page shows If the current state of editing is set to back annotations then all additions or modifications of properties except of SLD properties are added to the back annotation object no matter how the edit mode is set If the current state of editing is set to the schematic sheet and the edit mode is to set to on then the additions and modifications to the properties are performed on the schematic sheet If the current state of editing is set to the schematic sheet and edit mode is set to off then no property additions or modifications are allowed When the current state of editing affects only back annotated data properties whose back annotated value is shown are displayed in red and the properties on the schematic sheet are displayed in the color of the owning object When the current state of editing affects only the properties on the sheet back annotated data is not displayed Using a Parent Instance to Lock a Schematic Sheet for Edit You can also lock schematic sheet edits by attaching the Source_Edit_Allowed property with the value of false to the parent instance on another sheet In this case when you traverse down to the sheet of the parent instance edits cannot be made to the schematic sheet until the Source_Edit_Allowed property value is changed to true and the sour
350. tion about the design root top level can come from the default component interface table or the default symbol which ever you specify If the root component has more than one component interface table or symbol you can specify the source by entering the name of the object in the Root Name entry box References You may specify that the viewpoint is to use the most Current version of every referenced design object or use the versions that were used the last time the viewpoint was saved to disk Last Used Version You may open a viewpoint on any existing version of the specified root component Preset Global Parameters You may specify global parameters when you invoke on the viewpoint Otherwise you may specify global parameters with the Add Parameters command after the editor comes up Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 21 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Default Window Arrangement Sy MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help da_n card_reader pcb_design_vpt_1 J ia Setup DESIGN CONFIGURATION y EDIT Design Viewpoint Window __ COUNTS ZOOM ZOOM gt IN OUT Design Configuration el AREA ALL PARAMETER AA PRIMITIVE ETa SUBSTITUTE CLOSE VPT VISIBLE PROPERTY PRIM VIS PROP SETUP VPT a Configuration al e Window
351. tion time Property values with the variable switch set are allowed to be changed anytime The value represents a nominal default value that is suitable for specifying the initial design but may not adequately specify the completed design The nominal default value may be changed on the symbol as new libraries are released Some examples are the Rise and Fall properties and the Model property Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 15 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Attribute Modified and Value Modified Properties e Sheet designer performs two types of edits o Changes the property value o Changes the location or look of a property e VALUE MODIFIED flag set when value changes ATTRIBUTE_MODIFIED flag set when graphical attributes are changed and when the value is changed e VALUE MODIFIED flag can be manually set with the pulldown menu Miscellaneous gt Mark Property Value 5 16 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Attribute Modified and Value Modified Properties There are basically two types of edits that a sheet designer can perform on properties on the instance If the designer moves a property value relative to the instance or changes the text height or justification of the value then an attribute of the property value has been modified The property now has a flag attached to it called the ATTRIBUTE_MODIFIED flag If a designer changes th
352. to Edit and Merge Back Annotations Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 61 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Editing in the Context of a Design Viewpoint Design N ba LE VIEWPOINT Simulator A Back Annotation Flle 8 a a gt A A a 7 15 ua ut 5 a i 0 a 4 i a Source Schematic d Simulator Design Viewpoint 6 62 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation Editing in the Context of a Design When you click on the SET VIEWPOINT icon in Design Architect and specify the name of a design viewpoint you are opening the sheet in the context of a design viewpoint Back annotation properties can be viewed on the sheet along with the properties that were added when the schematic sheet was originally created Both sources of properties can be displayed on the schematic sheet and viewed in their evaluated or unevaluated state When viewed in its unevaluated state the property values appear as when you created them on the source sheet When viewed evaluated all variables in the expressions are evaluated using the defined parameters When back annotations are displayed you can edit the annotations and save them in the back annotation object or you can merge them to the sheet where they appear subsequently as the property values for every occurrence
353. to symbol text and graphics by choosing Edit gt Remove Comment Status Any formerly electrical information such as a pin is not restored unless you undo all functions up to and including Convert to Comment Converted comment objects from symbol body text retain the attributes that they had when they were symbol objects Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 9 Additional Editing Features Add a Sheet Border e pulldown menu Edit gt Add Sheet Border 4 10 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Adding a Sheet Border Built in Mentor Graphics userware allows you to add a sheet border in the form of comment text and graphics You can choose from a variety of sizes as shown in the figure on the left This userware can be customized to match your company specifications Refer to the add_sheet_border function description and Appendix A Custom Userware in the Design Architect Reference Manual for information on how to customize sheet borders Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 11 Additional Editing Features 4 12 Creating a Bus Bundle Bus Same electrical meaning as a set of individual wires bound together in order Bundle an ordered collection of wires buses and bundles on a single schematic A bus must have a net name in the following form Bus 3 pixels Most significant bit i a Data 0 3 D f Bus name no space Least significant bit
354. ts and Back Annotation Setting Up for a Downstream Application z i MGC File Edit Setup Report Miscellaneous Help da_n card_reader pcb_design_vpt_1 J ia Setup DESIGN CONFIGURATION 7 ae DEBUG 1 Click Here UNSELECT SELECT z ALL COUNTS z ZOOM ZOOM gt 2 Click Here IN Qut MAREA ALL PARAMETER PRIMITIVE SUBSTITUTE VISIBLE PROPER es Setup Viewpoint Eaape S Os lt QuickPart Builder Accusim Contimuum Quick SIM Fault Path amp Grade eam QuickSim amp QuickPath QuickFault amp QuickGrade QuickFault Only CLOSE VPT ET 3 in lah OPEN WIS PROP SHEET SETUP VPT 3 Click Here mE o ERE A E PCB ARCHY COMP WINDOW WINDOW y Hybrid 4 TE OK Reset Cancel Ei F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FQ F10 F11 F12 Unselect A Open Dvpt Popup Me Report Ob Add Prope Open Shee Pulldown M Command Pop Windo Close Dvpti Change Pr Open Sele Read File Close Win Reopen Se Save Dvpt Reslect Check Des Delete Pro C Open Up Open Dow A My 6 24 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Working with
355. ttings dialog box as shown on the left There are three levels of checking report all errors and warnings report only errors and do not check By default all errors and warnings for symbol pins symbol bodies special symbols and symbol interfaces are reported You can change the check levels of symbol pins the symbol body special symbols and the symbol s interfaces by clicking the appropriate check buttons If you want to specify a macro file containing additional design rule checks click the All button under Userrule Checks and type the pathname in the Macro File text entry box The default userrule check setting is No Check Results normally appear in a check status report window or in a transcript but they are not saved to a file unless you specify a pathname and click the File Mode Add button The next time that you choose Check gt With Defaults the symbol default check levels will reflect the modifications you made in the dialog box for the duration of the Design Architect session N If you change the checking level of required checks to No Check Design Architect views the symbol as not passing the required Note checks Therefore you will not be able to instantiate the symbol on a sheet Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 19 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Saving the Symbol e File gt Save Symbol e Always check the symbol before saving e Unchecked symbols can t be instantiat
356. tween two or more instance pins The term net refers to either a single wire or a collection of wires called a bus A bus is sometimes called a bundle A net may contain net vertices corner points net segments the pieces between two vertices and net junctions Although Design Architect assigns an internal system name to each net a handle name like N 3 you can assign names that have more meaning External nets the nets connected to ports must be named to match the pins on the associated symbol You can also assign internal nets meaningful names to make it easier for you to identify them in downstream applications Two or more nets with identical names are treated as connected even if they may not be graphically connected on the sheet Two nets with identical names on different sheets in the same schematic are also treated as connected Graphically wires are designated as single pixel lines Buses are designated as three pixel lines by default but they can also be designated as five or seven pixel lines The thickness of a wire or bus is only for visual appearance The system knows whether a net is a wire or a bus by how it is named not how it looks Bus naming conventions will be discussed in a later module Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 2 25 Creating a Schematic Net Creation Process Schematic 1 my_dff sheet1 oe ees 1 Click to Start 3 Click for Vertex 2 Click for Vertex 4 Double click to End
357. ucture e Design Object Icons represent other objects within the component structure symbols schematics sheets e Part Object a binary object that contains the Component Interface table 7 6 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Component Structure Iconic View Your design data is modeled by an object oriented database and each object is represented by one or more directories or files in the Unix file system To make things simpler these objects are represented by icons when you view them through a window such as the Navigator If an object is really a Unix directory in the file system it is called a container A container can contain other objects The icon at the top of the illustration on the facing page shows the icon for a component structure Because a component is a container it contains several other objects such as the part object the symbol object and the schematic object The schematic object is also a container and can contain one or more sheet objects The schem_id object is a special object that helps the system manage the assignment of system identifiers handles to various objects on the schematic sheets The subject of handles will be covered in a later module The part object is a special object that contains the Component Interface table Remember that this table acts like the control center of the component where information about the s
358. ue adding the Pin and Pintype properties using the following information Pin Names PinType Pin Placement Top Bottom Right Right 9 Add my_dff symbol text by clicking on the TEXT palette button and the ADD TEXT palette icon Enter the text into the prompt bar entry box 10 When you are finished your symbol should look like the following aS n PRE on lt D Q Pa miy a QB lt OUT CLR Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 65 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Resizing Rotating and Repositioning Property Text Next you will resize rotate and reposition property text to make you symbol look like the following illustration IN n Da Qo my_dff oc QB ow O 3 66 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties 1 10 Set the Selection Filter for Property Text only by drawinga stroke Setup Select Filter Selection Filter will allow selection of __ Comments __ Symbol Bodies __ Pins M Properties Comment Text Reset to MGC Defaults Set All Clear All OK Reset Cancel Click the Clear All button then the Properties button Draw a _ stroke to execute the form Now draw a selection box around the property text on the interior of the symbol rectangle All the Pin property text is selected Place the mouse pointer on the sym
359. up of tasks related to the parent menu item On the facing page the cascading Location Map menu item has four tasks 1 Set the Working Directory 2 Show the current location map 3 Change an entry in the location map and 4 Re read the location map from disk To choose the menu item that you want you slide the mouse pointer over the menu cascade arrow and on top of the desired menu item before releasing the mouse button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 19 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Palettes e Default palette displayed on invocation e Name of palette depends on the application Three palette areas Select a Palette Common Buttons Palette Icons Palette Area Popup Menu 1 20 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Palettes A palette is a convenient way to execute commands without having to traverse menu paths You click the Select mouse button to execute a palette item These items fall into three categories depending on the area of the palette Palette Selection A palette is really a group of palettes all in one area The top part of each application palette is identical and contains several choices each representing a different palette The button for the palette that is currently being view is highlighted in red so if you click on it nothing happens When you click on any other button you can access the correspo
360. us window The object associated with that handle name is selected on the sheet 2 Close the Check Status window with a stroke The schematic window is automatically reactivated Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 73 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Save the Sheet 1 Save the schematic to disk by executing File gt Save Sheet gt Default Registration from the pulldown menu i 2 Iconify the Schematic Window 3 74 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Exercise 3 Adding Properties to a Symbol In this exercise you will complete the symbol that you began in Exercise 1 by adding additional properties to the symbol body Expand the Symbol Window 1 At the end of Exercise 1 you iconified the Symbol Editor Window for my_dff Find this icon in the DA Session window and double click on it The window should expand to its original size 2 Draw an Unselect All stroke to make sure that all objects are unselected Set the Select Filter 1 Set the selection filter to Symbol Bodies Setup Select Filter Selection Filter will allow selection of __ Comments a aes Bodies __ Pins C moies __ Comment Text Reset to MGC Defaults Set All Clear All OK Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 75 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties
361. use pointer on the MODEL property value schematic of the ADD_CONVERT instance Press SHIFT F7 Specify a new value of hdl in the form then click OK Was the change added to the back annotation object _____If not why not Repeat steps 6 and 7 Specify a new value of hdl in the form and change the BA Name from pcb_design_vpt to sim_vpt then click OK Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 6 101 Working with Design Viewpoints and Back Annotation 11 The change is recorded in the sim_vpt back annotation object even through it is not the highest priority object Change the pcb_design_vpt Connection Priority Normally a read only back annotation object is connected in a lower priority position so newly created back annotations are recorded in the highest priority object 1 Click on the peb_design_vpt back annotation object in the Back Annotation window choose File gt Back Annotations gt Disconnect then click OK 2 From the popup menu choose Back Annotation gt Connect 3 Select the i pcb_design_vpt back annotation object from the Navigator then click OK 4 Click the Read only Yes button enter a 1 in the Priority entry box then click OK This connects the read only peb_design_vpt back annotation object in the second highest priority position Now any new back annotation will be recorded in the sim_vpt back annotation object Unlatch the sim_vpt Design Viewpoint In the next exercise
362. user defined macro file that contains your own schematic checks and specify the pathname to the file that contains your user defined checks You can also change how the check results are displayed or stored Check results are displayed in a check status window placed in a transcript but not stored in a file You can change these values by clicking the appropriate button Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 45 Additional Editing Features Lab Overview ao PARITY TEST voc ae r e tL READ 2 8 z 2 ACCESS 15 0 i i 74259 i E ao 74259 74LS161A p CLR Q1 6 JE ao CLR ai o 279 CLRQ1 4 START TOAD my soit A0 Q3hi Q2 OOO O u inr RCO inv gt o bcLk A Hy A0 Q35 a oc A2 Q5 Al 3 ENP _IQBO lt Q6 13 A2 4 ook o lo D Q744 a A QA D Q PULSE B QB c QD j _CLR i i on NN ADDRESS_IN amp gt inv and2 inv gt O and2 inv gt O LATCH 4 46 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Additional Editing Features Lab Exercises Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 4 47 Additional Editing Features Exercise 1 Creating a Hierarchical Design Introduction In this exercise you will
363. ve changed your sheet will fail check The Edit gt Replace menu item lets you replace the symbol instance with an instance of another symbol Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 13 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Symbol and Instance Properties e Symbol Specific Property o A Property Added to the Symbol o May or May not be Modifiable on an Instance e Instance Specific Property o A Property Added to a Particular Instance o Not Added if a Symbol Property by the Same Name Exists 5 14 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks Symbol and Instance Properties There are two classes of properties that are electronically visible on an instance These are e Symbol specific properties Properties that are added to the symbol e Instance specific properties Properties that are added to a specific instance on a sheet The following discussion concentrates on symbol specific properties These properties can be further subdivided into the following categories e Fixed Properties Symbol specific properties that are never intended to be modified on the instance These properties have their property stability switch value set to fixed Examples are Pin and Class properties Variable and Protected Properties Symbol specific properties that are allowed to be modified on the instance Property values with the protected switch set are only allowed to be changed at instantia
364. vert design that you created in the last module Use the following figure as a guide to create the card_reader schematic RF_IN RF_IN OSC SERIAL_OUT ANALOG CLR g Osc ADDRESS _IN FREQ_DET _CLR am STA PULSE LATCH START PULSE LATCH TART ULSE TCH ACCESS CHK RED_LED DATA_BUS 15 0 ea GREEN_LED _CLR RED_LED GREEN_LED N a CLR ACCESS 15 0 ADDRESS_IN READ ADD_CONVERT schematic 1 Set the working directory to lt your_home_directory gt training da_n 2 From the Design Architect Session window click on the OPEN SHEET icon 5 26 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 3 Fill in the dialog boxes as shown in the following illustration Open Sheet Component Name card_reader Navigator Sheet Sheet eee Click here Startup File Path Open Sheet Options Component training da_n card_reader Available Version 0 Existing New Sheet Click here Schematic schematic Sheet sheet1 Sheet Border No Yes Size D 2 Set OK Reset Cancel Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 5 27 Design Hierarchy and Functional Blocks 4 Click on the Yes button for Sheet Border 5 Click OK on
365. verview Design Architect i in the Framework Environment mene Creating a Schematic Module 2 y e Design Viewpoint Concepts Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Module 3 Evaluating Properties y e Checking the Whole Additional Design Hi
366. vs Evaluations _ SSSSSSSSSCSSSSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSCA 6 Viewing and Editing Properties 6 68 Viewing and Editing Properties continued 5 70 Back Annotated Property Evaluation SSCS 6 72 Back Annotation Property Evaluation Continued 8 74 Expressions in Back Annotations 6 76 Merging Back Annotations 8 78 Back Annotations and Reusable Sheets 6 80 Lab Exercises____ 683 Print Out the Lab Exercises____SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 6 83 Exercise 1 Creating a Simulation Viewpoint_____ C 6 84 Exercise 2 Creating a PCB Viewpoint____W ___ 6 95 Exercise 3 Cross connecting a Back Annotation Object______ SOA3 100 Exercise 4 Merging Annotations to the Source Sheet_____ 26 103 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Module 7 Component Interfaces and Registration ___ SSS Module 7 Overview 7 2 Lesson____ 7 3 Component Structure Conceptual View 4 Component Structure Iconic View __ 7 8 Content of Component Interface 7 8 Model Labels and the MODEL Property 7 10 Creating More than One Schematic 7 12 Registering More than One Schematic 7 14 Adding Labels to Models 7 16 Unregister Models __ 7 18 Creating More than One Symbol _ 7 20 Registering More than One Symbol 7 22 Validating Models __ _ 7 2 4 Multiple Component Interfaces EO 7 26 Reporting on Interfaces 7 28 CIB
367. wed to be moved outside of their owner component container It you attempt to move a symbol outside of its component container Design Manager issues an error message and does not move the symbol When you delete an object all objects and references in the containment hierarchy are also deleted Any external references that point to the deleted object are not updated and are therefore invalid that is they simply point to an object that no longer exists Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 1 59 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Checking and Changing Design References CHECK REFS a lib and2 omponent_lib and2 a ma 1 60 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Design Architect in the Framework Environment Checking and Changing Design References It is a good practice to always check for broken references before you invoke an application on design data that has been relocated You can check for broken references by selecting the icon in the Navigator window that represents the top root level of the design When you click on the CHECK REFS icon in the Design Manager palette a search for broken design references begins at that point and extends down the tree Broken references are reported in the Fix Broken References form as shown on the left You may fix a broken reference by typing the complete old pathname in the left entry box then the complete new pathname in
368. within it 3 Check for broken references 4 Create a configuration to copy the card_reader design and its associated design objects Print Out the Lab Exercises If you are reading this workbook online you might want to print out these lab exercises to have them handy when you are at your workstation Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 8 25 Using Design Manager to Release Designs Exercise 1 Exploring References The purpose of this exercise is to familiarize you with viewing references that are either created by the Design Manager or Design Architect First you will manually create a reference to the card_reader component using the Design Manager Then you will then view the references that were generated by Design Architect when you created card_reader circuit in the previous lab exercises 1 Bring up the Design Manager if it hasn t already been invoked 2 Navigate to the lt your_path gt training da_n directory 3 Create a reference from the card_reader component to the document card_reader rel_notes as follows a Select the card_reader b Choose the following popup menu item Add gt Reference A dialog navigator is displayed c Double click on the com directory The contents of the com directory is displayed in the Navigator window d Click on card_reader rel_notes then click OK 4 Verify that a reference points from card_reader to card_reader rel_notes a Select the card_reader icon then click
369. y also be performed e Symbol userrules This is a user defined category You can create a macro file containing design rules that you want checked and provide a pathname to the file When the required checking is complete the design rules specified in the macro file are checked e Symbol interface Verifies that pins and properties match the component interface with which the symbol is registered To check using the default check settings choose Check gt With Defaults Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 17 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Changing Required Checks e Resets default checking requirements e Check gt Set Defaults displays Default Symbol Check Settings No Userrule Checks cs Errors Errors WY All No Check Warnings Only Check Special D O Macro File pa File Mode Pi o lt gt v a a Add Replace No File Symbol Body L lt File da_check_file Interface lt gt lt gt Display in Window Requires check category Write to Transcript OK Reset Cancel e Three levels of checking o Report all errors and warnings o Report only errors o Do not check 3 18 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Changing Required Checks You can change the check defaults by choosing the Check gt Set Defaults menu item This brings up a Default Symbol Check Se
370. ymbol pins symbol body properties and each model is collect and retained Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 7 7 Component Interfaces and Registration Content of Component Interface TRAINING da_n my_df my_dff Default Graphical Models co my_dff TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff my_dff gt part default_sym Functional Models schematic TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff schematic schem_id schematic gt sheet schematic default I l Interface be Name A my_dff TRAINING da_n card_reader my_dff D Interface gt a es _ Content CLR j A qfall 0 qbfall 0 qrise 0 qbrise 0 V model schematic 7 N gt lt i 7 8 Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 Component Interfaces and Registration Content of Component Interface The figure on the left shows the structure and content of the Component Interface table as seen through the Component Window The structure of the component is shown on the left side of the window When the name of the component interface is selected as shown in the illustration the content of the interface is displayed in three windows on the right side The top window displays information about the models that are registered to the interface The center window displays information about the symbol pi
371. you locate and position objects and text on a sheet The pin grid constrains electrical objects such as nets symbol instances and pins to the pin spacing established through the Setup gt gt Page menu item The snap grid controls placement of non electrical objects such as comment graphics comment text symbol text and property text and is defined in terms of the pin grid When you choose the Setup gt Grid Report Color gt Grid menu item the Set Grid dialog box appears with the current grid settings The following list describes the information shown in the dialog box on the left Grids Per Pin Number of snap grid points per pin spacing The default is 4 e Minor Multiple An integer specifying the number of grid locations between displayed grid points dots The default is 1 e Major Multiple Specifies every Nth displayed grid point with a cross and is normally constructed to be on the pin grid The default is 4 e Snap Restricts cursor placement to grid points e Show Displays the grid points specified by the minor multiple The illustration on the facing page shows a graphical description of the grid Note the two types of pointers the pointer smoothly tracks the mouse and the moving pointer indicates the nearest grid point and restricts cursor movement so that electrical and comment objects align with grid points If snap is on both the pointer and the moving pointer are visible if the snap is off only the
372. zontal Justification Specifies horizontal justification Visibility Specifies whether the values of instance specific properties are visible or hidden on the schematic sheet The results of changing the default values are displayed the next time property text is added Design Architect Training Workbook V8 5 3 55 Creating a Symbol and Adding Properties Quick Report on Property Text Design Architect 4 MGC File Edit Setup Miscellaneous Check Report View Help Sel 1 W dae my_dff my_dff 1 1572 1 8591 im 1 Click button raviv we ny Bue Vy symbol_text SESSION P TEXT DRAW DELETE UNDO MOVE COPY UNSELECT SET SELECT ALL FILTER 9 NAME 7 z NAME 2 E La NAME 3 CHANGE EQUENCE VALUE AUE 2 p A A B B ADD ALIGN TEXT TEXT 3 Click Property Text ON TEXT AL oy F F f TEXT AL 5 gt SELECT BY ATTRI z PROPERTY BUTES TEXT ae ADD i 2 Click icon PROPERTY SETUP 5 Exit mode 9 Ne XT INFO A Text Location OK Cance F6 F7 Get Text Information F1 F2 F3 7 F4 F5 F8 F9 F10 Eii F12 Select Are Uieeleces feats Popup Me Placa Sum Sat Grid amp Sal Tvt y View Area Setup Ses Pulldown M Command Pop Windo elect Ver Unselect us iew ead

design_architect_tra..

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents